specifications for electrical unit substation … · 2015-08-03 · specifications for if1302...

SPECIFICATIONS FOR

IF1302 ELECTRICAL UNIT SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT

DULLES EAST BUILDING WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT

Specifications November 6, 2013

Prepared by: Shah & Associates, Inc. 416 North Frederick Avenue Gaithersburg, MD 20877 301-926-2797

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION SECTION TITLE PAGES

DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 7

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 SUMMARY 6 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 5 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 9 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 6 01 32 33 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 2 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS 8 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 18 01 42 00 REFERENCES 6 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 6 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 6 01 73 00 EXECUTION 2 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING 5 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 4 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 13 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 6 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 5

DIVISION 02 NOT USED

DIVISION 03- CONCRETE 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 7

DIVISION 04-25 NOT USED

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 05 13 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES 8 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 4 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5 26 05 43 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5 26 05 73 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND ARC FLASH

STUDY 9

26 11 16 SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS 9 26 13 00 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR – SOURCE TRANSFER SWITCH 7 26 23 00 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 12

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1


26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 7 26 23 00 ENGINE GENERATOR 14 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES 7 DIVISION 27-30 NOT USED

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK

31 01 00 EARTHWORK 10 31 25 14 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 20 DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 16 ASPHALT PAVING 7 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING 4 32 13 73 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 6 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 4 DIVISION 33 NOT USED

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


SECTION 007300 — SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The articles and paragraphs of this Section represent supplements or additions to the Contract Provisions or the Special Provisions.

1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. During the period of this Project, the Authority anticipates that other construction contracts may be underway at or near the site of work of this Contract. A list of adjacent construction activities follows:

1. Electrical Substation Replacement – JP Morgan Chase Building.

1.4 PERMITTING

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the Authority's “Building Codes Manual”. This manual describes Building Codes organization, Building Code inspection process, Certificate of Occupancy requirements, and information regarding elevators, escalators, and moving walks. The Authority will file for and provide the construction permit.

1.5 MAINTENANCE OF PEDESTRIAN AND VEHICULAR TRAFFIC

A. Maintain adequate pedestrian and vehicular traffic flow and safety along the service roads, sidewalks, parking lots and other roadways on Airport property. In addition, this requirement applies to crossroads, approaches, and entrances affected by or made necessary by the Work. Coordinate activities throughout the project in a manner that allows emergency access, without delays to emergency response vehicles, to all areas of the Project that are occupied by employees.

B. Prior to starting construction operations affecting pedestrian, vehicular, or aircraft traffic movement, submit and obtain the COTR's written approval of a Traffic Maintenance Plan. Develop plan in accordance with the safety requirements of the FAA, Airport Operations, and the Commonwealth of Virginia Department of Transportation’s “Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices”. Utilize the form indicated in the latest edition of the Virginia Department of Transportation’s “Virginia Work Area Protection Manual – Standards and Guidelines”.

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 007300 - 1


C. Provide and maintain temporary signage, "Jersey barriers," and such other traffic control devices or personnel as required complying with approved Traffic Maintenance Plan.

D. Maintain the construction operations affecting pedestrian, vehicular, or aircraft traffic movement from the beginning of construction operations until final acceptance of the project. The maintenance shall constitute continuous and effective work prosecuted day by day with adequate equipment and forces to the end of project to ensure that roadways and structures are maintained in satisfactory condition at all times, including barricades and warning signs as necessary for performance of the work.

E. Keep the portions of the project being used by public, pedestrian and vehicular traffic, whether it is through or local traffic, in such condition that traffic will be adequately accommodated. Remove snow and control all ice within the project boundaries. Removal of snow and ice for the benefit of the traveling public will be performed by the Authority. Bear all cost of maintenance work during construction and before the project receives a Certificate of Occupancy for constructing and maintaining approaches, crossings, intersections and other features as may be necessary.

F. Keep the portions of the road pavement surfaces being used by the public free from irregularities, obstructions, mud, dirt, snow, ice, and any characteristic that might present a hazard or annoyance to traffic in such condition that traffic will be adequately accommodated.

1.6 AIRFIELD AND TERMINAL BUILDING OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Phase construction activities as necessary to accommodate all airport operations without disruption. Adhere to all current Airport Orders and Instructions (O & Is), Airport Bulletins, and Airport Advisories. The Authority will provide relevant Orders and Instructions to Offerors in the Solicitation Package. Bulletins and Advisories will be provided to the offeror by the Authority as they are issued.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Comply with all Federal, state and local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the environment. Take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, rivers, lakes, ponds, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, chemicals, or other harmful materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter.

B. Notify COTR immediately in the event that abnormalities, discolorations, odors, oil, or other signs of potential contamination by hazardous materials are encountered during excavation or other construction activities. Follow with written notice within 24 hours, indicating date, time, and location of potential contaminants encountered. The COTR will provide further direction to Contractor regarding disposition of materials encountered.

C. All painted surfaces are assumed to contain lead-based paint. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary health and safety requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations to work in these conditions. The removal and disposal of lead-based paint is part of this contract.



1.8 DAMAGES AND PRE-EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Be responsible for all damages caused by Contractor’s construction activities. Provide all labor, materials, etc. to return any damaged areas, systems or equipment to their original condition at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Perform a survey of pre-existing conditions in the vicinity of Contractor’s construction activities, utilizing photographs and other means as necessary to document existing damage or conditions. Submit two copies of this survey to the Contracting Officer within 21 calendar days after Notice-to-Proceed. This survey will assist in resolving any damage claims against the Contractor during and after construction.

C. Preserve all roadways, pedestrian and directional signage. Deliver all signs removed and not required for reinstallation to the Authority as directed by the COTR.

D. Replace or repair lost or damaged signs at no cost to the Authority.

1.9 SECURITY DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Maintain the integrity of the Airport Security fence. Maintain the integrity of doors and walls between public areas and Air Operations Area (AOA) at all times. Comply with Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations, Parts 1500, 1540, 1542 and 1544.

B. Possession of and display of a proper and current Airport Identification Badge, issued by Airport Operations is required for all Contractor personnel passing into the AOA. Refer to "Airport Orders and Instructions" attached as part of the Contract for specific requirements. Security requirements have increased significantly at Washington Dulles International Airport. Contractor can expect possible short delays clearing construction vehicles into the AOA. Offerors shall become intimately familiar with all TSA and Authority security requirements. No increase in contract price will be provided to the Contractor should the contractor not be aware of any security procedure in place at time of submitting their offer that leads to increased time and inconvenience to accomplish the work.

C. Pay all fines levied by the Transportation Security Administration for penalties resulting from security infractions perpetrated by or caused by Contractor’s personnel or work forces of Contractor’s subcontractors or suppliers.

D. Establish and maintain the security of Contractor’s staging areas, equipment and materials.

E. Provide escort for delivery vehicles transporting materials and supplies to or from the Contractor's staging or work areas into the AOA, in accordance with requirements stated in "Airport Orders and Instructions" attached as part of the Contract.

F. Do not park within 300 feet of a terminal building unless specifically authorized by Airport Operations.

G. All workers in the sterile areas, which are defined as areas accessible to ticketed passengers only, may utilize tools in their work provided that:

1. Tools are essential and necessary to the Work.



2. Keep tools controlled at all times. 3. Do not leave tools unattended. 4. Store tools in locked boxes.

H. No knives will be permitted in the sterile areas.

I. No firearms or weapons of any type are allowed on the airport.

J. No cartridge style nail guns, nor any tools that use a cartridge or any explosive charge, are

allowed without prior written notification of COTR. Obtain written approval from the COTR before bringing such tools on the project.

K. Conform to all Orders and Instructions pertaining to vehicle inspection. Modify below to indicate specific routes or entrance gates as required to suit project.

1.10 MATERIAL HAULING

A. The designated haul routes for hauling operations will not require vehicles utilizing existing taxi lanes or taxiways. Under no conditions shall the Contractor plan use of taxiways and taxi lanes for hauling equipment. Haul routes for this project will be designated by the COTR.

B. Conduct hauling operations between the hours of 10 p.m. and 6 a.m., unless approved

otherwise by the COTR.

C. Include all work associated with establishing, maintaining, signing, lighting and marking haul routes.

D. Use load covers on all dump trucks. Load dump trucks so that no spillage occurs during transit on the State, municipal, or Airport roadways, taxiways, and aprons. Clean wheels of trucks leaving the Project construction site of all soil and rocks.

E. Submit a detailed Work Plan for Contractor’s entire operations to the COTR for approval prior

to commencing work. Obtain written approval from the COTR of the Work Plan. Identify clearly on Work Plan each operation requiring coordination with Airport Operations.

F. Notify the COTR at least 72 hours in advance of requirement for scheduled roadway closures. Obtain the written approval of the Authority prior to closing or crossing a roadway.

1.11 PORTABLE LIGHTING

A. Portable lighting: If used for Contractor operations, aim and shield portable lighting at all times to eliminate glare that could impair runway, taxiway, apron, ground operations, and Airport Traffic Control Tower operations. Equip portable lighting with reflectors and glare shields to prevent spillover of light into operational areas.

1.12 SAFETY

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the most current edition of the Authority Construction Safety Manual”. Offerors are provided with the most recent addition when obtaining contract



documents prior to proposal. Requirements included in this Section are in addition to the Authority’s Construction Safety Manual. Comply with all local, State and Federal requirements. Where conflicts or discrepancies exist between requirements, the more stringent requirement shall govern. For additional information see Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”.

B. Provide safe and healthful working conditions on each operation at all times during execution the work of this Contract. Conduct the various operations connected with the Work so that they will not be injurious to safety or health. Comply with all provisions, regulations and recommendations issued pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 and the Construction Safety Act of 1969, as well as amendments to these laws. Comply with laws, rules and regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction, with regard to all matters relating to the safety and health of workers and the general public. Compliance with government requirements is mandated by law and considered only a minimum level of safety performance. Perform all work in accordance with best safe work practices recognized by the construction industry. Stop work whenever a work procedure or a condition at a work site is deemed unsafe by the either of the following individuals: COTR, the Contractor’s Project Manager, the Contractor’s Foreman, or the Contractor’s Safety Engineer(s).

C. Comply with all requirements set forth in the Authority's "Construction Safety Manual." Provide during the Work the services of Safety Engineer(s) as outlined in the Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual” and in Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”. The Safety Engineer shall undertake the duties and responsibilities as stated in the Authority's "Construction Safety Manual".

1. Obtain a permit to perform any welding, cutting, or hot work from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal.

2. Ensure adequate access to all construction areas for emergency response. 3. Obtain a permit from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal to store, handle, or use any

hazardous material, including but not limited to fuels for equipment. Complete an application prior to issuance.

4. Remove combustible debris from the site daily. 5. Provide at least seven (7) days notice for any request for inspections, tests, permits, etc.,

required of personnel from the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal. 6. Provide to the Office of the Authority Fire Marshal a list of emergency contact numbers

for the COTR and the Contractor prior to the commencement of Work.

D. Submit Site-Specific Safety and Health Plans to COTR within 15 calendar days of Notice to Proceed and prior to the start of any construction activities. Prepare this plan using the Authority’s Guidelines as defined in the Authority’s “Construction Safety Manual” and as supplemented by these specifications for each and every work zone as shown on the drawings or as anticipated by the Contractor. COTR must approve the Site-Specific Safety Plan prior to the start of any work.

E. Be responsible for the safe operation of all job site motor vehicles. Provide a “spotter” or flagman for all backing operations of construction vehicles with restricted rear vision.

F. All motorized equipment and vehicles working on or entering MWAA construction project work areas shall be equipped with functional audible backup alarms.



G. Crane Operators. On Airports Authority projects, Crane Operators shall be certified to operate

the equipment by an approved independent certifying agency.

H. Comply with sample safety plan as designated in the MWAA Construction Safety Manual.

1.13 HEIGHT LIMITATION

A. For all demolition and construction within the Airport, limit the height of Contractor's equipment to a maximum of 50 feet.

B. Prior to beginning any work coordinate with the COTR the height of all cranes, boom trucks, scaffolds or similar vehicles of construction. Properly mark all construction equipment with safety flags and warning lights in accordance with current FAA and Airport Operations requirements. Submit FAA Form 7460, provided by COTR, for all variations on approved crane heights.

1.14 NOISE CONTROL

A. The Authority recognizes and can tolerate a normal level of noise created by a majority of construction activity. However, in the interest of the Authority's neighbors, the maximum acceptable noise level between the hours of 5:00 pm and 7:00 am the following morning is limited to 55 decibels. During daytime hours of 7:00 am through 5:00 pm, the maximum acceptable noise level for sustained or repetitive noises is 72 decibels. Measure the noise level using an "A" scale at a point 4'-0" above ground at property line nearest noise source.

B. Secure advance written approval from the COTR prior to scheduling any activity that is anticipated to produce a sustained or repetitive noise level higher than the decibel limits indicated above.

C. In and around terminal facilities and buildings whose normal occupancy is from 7 a.m. to 7 p.m., perform work that causes noise that is disruptive to the airport’s tenants or the traveling public between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:00 am. Measure noise for this situation using an “A” scale at a point 4’-0” above ground at the closest point to airport tenants or the traveling public.

1.15 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK

A. The offeror is expected to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the proposal, plans, specifications, solicitation provisions, contract provisions, special provisions and contract forms before submitting a proposal. The submission of a proposal will be considered conclusive evidence that the offeror has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing the work as to the requirements of the Contract.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 007300



SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Work phases. 3. Type of Contract. 4. Use of premises. 5. The Authority's occupancy requirements. 6. Contractor hours of operation 7. Specification formats and conventions. 8. Marking utility services. 9. Utility outages.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of the Authority's facilities.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Electrical Unit Substation Replacement – Dulles East Building

1. Project Location: Washington Dulles International Airport

B. Architect/Engineer Identification: The Contract Documents, dated November 6, 2013, were prepared for Project by Shah & Associates, Inc.

C. The Work consists of:

1. Replacement of the existing electrical unit substation for the Dulles East Building.

SUMMARY 011000 - 1


2. The existing equipment consists of two 15kV switches; a 1500kVA, 15kV-480Vdry-type transformer and a 3000A, 480V switchboard.

3. The new equipment consists of a 15kV pad mounted source transfer switch; a 1500kVA, 15kV-480V liquid insulated substation transformer and a 2500A, 480V switchgear with draw-out circuit breakers.

4. For additional requirements for the examination of plans, specifications, and project site, see section, “Supplementary Conditions”.

1.4 WORK PHASES

A. Work show on the drawings shall be phased in a manner which:

1. Ensures that the new generator is installed and generator backup power is available prior to beginning work on replacing the switchboard.

2. Ensures that both of the incoming 13.2kV feeders are available to provide redundancy to the building loads for the duration of the construction.

1.5 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.

1.6 USE OF PREMISES

A. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to the areas involving new and modified equipment and adjacent areas as required to perform the work. The areas include:

a. Dulles East Building basement electrical room and adjacent garage. b. Dulles East Building parking lot, at and adjacent to the existing manhole and

proposed switch pad locations.

2. Authority Occupancy: Allow for Authority occupancy of site and day-to-day use by tenants, air carriers, and the public.

3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to the Authority, the Authority's employees, tenants, air carriers, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use driveways and entrances for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

SUMMARY 011000 - 2


b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

B. Utilize areas designated for Contractor staging, storage, and parking, as indicated. For additional requirements, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

1.7 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Authority Occupancy: The Authority and/or its tenants will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with COTR during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Authority usage, and perform the Work so as not to interfere with day-to-day Airport operations.

B. For additional requirements for tenant operational requirements, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

1.8 CONTRACTOR HOURS OF OPERATION

A. Contractor Working Hours: The Authority anticipates that the Contractor may desire to work multiple shifts to accomplish the work of this Contract within the established schedule. Work is subject to restrictions of the Airport operational requirements. Notify the COTR 24-hours in advance of any change to the work schedule.

1.9 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: With the exception of Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) standard specifications and Virginia Department of Transportation standard specifications the Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 33-Division format using the CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat 2004" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section titles to help with cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete as all available Sections and Section numbers are not used and the CSI numbering system is not sequentially complete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

SUMMARY 011000 - 3


1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Interpret words and meanings as appropriate. Infer words implied, but not stated, as the sense requires. Interpret singular words as plural, and plural words as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are used in these Specifications. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.10 MARKING UTILITY SERVICES

A. Employ underground utilities location subcontractor to locate and mark the horizontal location of all utility lines that might be impacted by construction activities, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Electric power lines. 2. Natural gas lines. 3. Sanitary Sewers. 4. Storm Sewers. 5. FAA communications, signal, and security lines. 6. Runway lighting lines 7. Water supply piping. 8. Fuel Lines. 9. Telephone lines. 10. Data lines. 11. Underground Storage Tanks. 12. High Temperature Hot Water (HTHW) and chilled water lines. 13. Dedicated Fire System (DFS) lines.

B. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk at (703) 417-8300 a minimum of 72 hours prior to starting activities that include but are not limited to location and marking of horizontal locations of telephone and telecommunications lines belonging to the Authority as part of the Airport Communication System. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk a minimum of 72 hours prior to beginning operations, that include but are not limited to excavating, boring, pile-driving, digging or planting. Note the ACS does not locate utilities. Location is the responsibility of the Contractor’s underground utilities location subcontractor. The Airport Communications System (ACS) is merely notified as indicated previously.

C. The information in the Contract Documents concerning the type and location of underground utilities is neither guaranteed nor inclusive. The Contractor is responsible for determining the

SUMMARY 011000 - 4


type and location of underground utilities, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, so as to avoid damage thereto.

D. Check and verify the horizontal and vertical location (coordinates and elevation) of all utility lines that may exist within the limits of new work, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, by use of a Subsurface Utility Engineering company. Reconfirm such locations and verification of utilities discovered, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, and submit to the COTR a dimensional survey with such notations.

E. Dig test pits by hand shovel in the vicinity of the discovered utilities. Excavate test holes utilizing a vacuum excavator.

F. Repair any damage to discovered utility lines due to construction operations at no expense to the Authority. The Authority will assist the Contractor by making available any known information.

G. Submit to the COTR, for written approval, the name of the independent subsurface utility engineering company to be used.

H. The individual who performs the utility detection and location work shall have as a minimum five (5) years of similar experience in the area of subsurface utility detection and location engineering.

I. Submit to COTR the following:

1. List of utility detection equipment along with product information and data sheets that will be used specifically for this contract.

2. List of employee qualifications and résumés of those individuals who will be assigned specifically to this contract.

3. Within 60 calendar days of Notice to Proceed, a survey of all subsurface utility engineering results indicating the horizontal and vertical location, coordinates and elevation of all utilities.

1.11 UTILITY OUTAGES

A. Prior to any utility outage/interruption, obtain approval in writing from COTR. Request for approval of outages shall be submitted in writing at least 3 weeks in advance of the desired outage. Request shall include all information indicated below. The maximum allowable outage time is 3 hours. Outages will normally be scheduled to occur between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:00 am daily. Daytime outages on Sunday may be allowed, if requested. Only a single three hour outage will be permitted per day. Fully coordinate outage requests with COTR. Four days in advance of the approved outage, reconfirm the date, time, and duration of the outage, in writing, with the COTR.

SUMMARY 011000 - 5


B. Provide a written “Work Plan” on company letterhead. The Work Plan shall include a schedule of the outage, duration, identification of the service affected, temporary utility service to be provided, identification of available service alternative, and the action to be taken in case of an emergency. Describe the “scope of the work” to be accomplished during the outage, and the reason the outage is required. List the items of work that are planned to be done during the outage, with the approximate starting time and duration of each item.

C. If the utility outage is electrical, schedule (through the COTR) a pre-work meeting with the Airport Electrical Division, a minimum of three days prior to the scheduled outage

D. Where outages will result in loss of power to sanitary lift stations, provide either 1) backup electrical power for the lift station or 2) a suction/pump truck with a capacity of 3,000 gallons or greater. Transport sewage to alternate lift stations located on the Airport and dispose of in accordance with Airport procedures.




SUMMARY 011000 - 6


SECTION 012900 – APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with Contract CPM Schedule, List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Log.


1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for submittal of items required before final payment.

3. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for procedural requirements governing the submission of Project Record Documents.

4. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” for submittal of items required before final payment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and once accepted, to be used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule.

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 012900 - 1


c. Contract CPM Schedule. d. List of products. e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Contracting Officer at earliest possible date, but no later than 21 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed.

a. On projects requiring cost-loaded CPM Schedules, the accepted cost loading will satisfy the requirements for the Schedule of Values.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of COTR. c. Name of Architect/Engineer. d. The Authority’s Project number. e. Contractor's name and address. f. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Contract Modifications (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Price to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Price in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for the following items. The value assigned to the total of these line items shall be 5 percent of the Contract Price:

a. Testing and commissioning activities. b. Operation and Maintenance manuals. c. Punch list activities. d. Project Record Documents. e. Bonds and warranties. f. Demonstration and training.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar. Total shall equal the Contract Price.



5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Application for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between potential items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.

6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. quantities. 8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Application for Payment shall be complete.

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. At COTR’s option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values with the next Applications for Payment when Contract Modifications result in a change in the Contract Price.

1.5 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Contracting Officer and paid for by the Authority.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Application for Payment shall coincide with CPM schedule monthly update, or as otherwise indicated in the Agreement between the Authority and Contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and shall not exceed one calendar month, unless otherwise approved by COTR.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Contracting Officer, but supplied by COTR, for Application for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. The Authority will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Contract Modifications issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit one original and four copies of Application for Payment to the address indicated in the Section VII - Contract Provision, paragraph 04.B, each one signed and notarized. Include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.



1. Transmit Applications for Payment with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application in a manner acceptable to Contracting Officer.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers.

1. The Authority reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to the Authority.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 7. Copies of building permits. 8. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance

of the Work. 9. Initial progress report. 10. Report of pre-construction conference. 11. Performance and payment bonds. 12. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. 13. Submittal and approval of Contractor Safety Plan. 14. Subcontractor Payment Form: (Form J, "Contract Conditions," Section IX, "LDBE").

H. Monthly Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall accompany the submittal of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment include the following:

1. Subcontractor Payment Form. 2. Monthly Progress Report, prepared according to requirements specified in Division 01

Section "Construction Progress Documentation." 3. Evidence of payment for material on-site if reimbursement for such material is being

requested. 4. Update of Contract Record Documents.

I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Price.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Authority occupancy of designated portions of the Work, if applicable.

3. Advise COTR of change-over in security provisions.



J. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Price. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when the Authority took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

6. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. 7. Return of all Airport identification badges and keys.






SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 5. Project meetings.

a. Pre-award conference. b. Pre-construction conference. c. Pre-installation conference. d. Progress meetings. e. Partnering meetings.


1. Division 01 Section: "Execution" for the coordination of general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for coordinating Contract closeout.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1


repair of all components, mechanical, electrical, and otherwise. Contractor is cautioned that, where specific dimensions are not indicated or where Drawings are schematic in nature, as with most Electrical and Mechanical Drawings, Contractor shall have sole responsibility to coordinate the work to meet this requirement. Prepare and submit Coordination Drawings to COTR for review and approval as provided in "Coordination Drawings" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article of this Section.

4. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for COTR and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work and completion within the specified Contract duration. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Start-up, check-out, and final acceptance of systems. 8. Project closeout activities. 9. Protection of existing and new work.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as the Authority's property.

E. Temporary Utility Outages: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Before start of the Work, prepare Coordination Drawings for areas with limited space availability that necessitate maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components, and areas requiring coordination for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate all dimensions provided on Contract Drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment, minimum clearance requirements, amounts of equipment and material to be installed, or other requirements.



Provide alternate sketches for resolution of such conflicts to COTR for review. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations shall not be considered changes to the Contract.

3. Indicate required installation sequences. 4. Comply with requirements contained in Division 01 Section "Submittals." 5. Prepare coordination drawings of involved trades in a scale of not less than 1/4 inch = 1

foot or larger for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. Any Work installed prior to review of coordination drawings will be at the Contractor’s risk and subsequent relocation require to avoid interference shall be made at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Key Personnel Names: At the pre-construction meeting, submit a list of Contractor's key personnel assignments. Key personnel shall include but not necessarily be limited to Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Safety Manager, Safety Engineer, Quality Control Manager, Project Scheduler, Soil Excavation Engineers, and other personnel in attendance at Project site along with alternates. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep the list current at all times.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor

will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Contract Name 2. Contract Number 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Resident Engineer 6. Name of Task Manager 7. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature.



13. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, color photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,

thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs:

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 2. RFI must be signed and scanned for electronic transmission. 3. Hard-Copy RFI shall follow Software-Generated RFI for the record.

E. COTR’s Action: COTR will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for COTR's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. COTR's action may include a request for additional information, in which case COTR's time for response will start again.

3. COTR's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal.

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify COTR in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. On receipt of COTR’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify COTR within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly prior to progress meeting for inclusion in progress meeting minutes. Include the following:

1. Project name.



2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name of COTR. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date COTR’s response was received.

Retain one of two subparagraphs below. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project Superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Pre-award Conference:

1. General: At the request of the Contracting Officer, a pre-award conference with Contractor may be held before actual award of the Contract. The meeting will review Contractor's understanding of the Contract Documents, cost and pricing data, contractual requirements, and Contractor's capabilities, financial standing, and past experience prior to award.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and all relevant parties.

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Authority Design Project Manager, Architect/Engineer, Contractor and its key personnel nominated for assignment to the Contract, and major subcontractors if so requested by the Contracting Officer. Concerned parties shall each be represented by persons thoroughly familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the work described in the Contract Documents. The Contracting Officer will chair the pre-award meeting.

3. Agenda: Significant discussion items that could affect award include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Provision and acceptability of payment and performance bonds. b. LDBE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation. c. Qualifications of key individuals. d. Quality-control experience. e. Percentage of work performed by own forces. f. Contractor's experience with similar work, including previous Authority contracts. g. Scheduling capabilities of Contractor. h. Financial standing of Contractor. i. Mobilization plan.



j. Understanding of work described in the Contract Documents and the physical constraints associated with work at the Airport.

k. Equipment and manpower availability. l. Cost and pricing data.

4. Representations and commitments made by Contractor or its subcontractors shall be construed as binding to the Contract.

B. Pre-construction Conference:

1. General: COTR will schedule pre-construction conference and organizational meeting with Contractor after the Contracting Officer issues a notice of intent to award, or actually awards the Contract. The meeting will review the parties' responsibilities and personnel assignments.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and relevant parties.

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Architect/Engineer, and their sub-consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Airport security. b. LBDE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation and certifications. c. Authority-controlled wrap-up insurance program. d. Airport Operations coordination. e. Preliminary construction schedule. f. Phasing. g. Critical work sequencing. h. Designation of key personnel. i. Procedures for processing field decisions and Contract Modifications. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. l. Authority Construction guidelines. m. Submittal procedures. n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. Safety procedures. u. Quality-control requirements. v. First aid. w. Progress cleaning. x. Working hours. y. Authority Building Code requirements/permits.



4. Refer to Contract Provision "Pre-construction Requirements" for required submittals due at the pre-construction conference.

C. Pre-installation Conferences:

1. General: COTR will conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes.

2. Attendees: Contractor, Installer, and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have proceeded, or will follow.

3. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related Contract Modifications. d. Purchases. e. Deliveries. f. Submittals. g. Possible conflicts. h. Compatibility problems. i. Time schedules. j. Weather limitations. k. Manufacturer's written recommendations. l. Warranty requirements. m. Compatibility of materials. n. Acceptability of substrates. o. Temporary facilities and controls. p. Space and access limitations. q. Governing regulations and permits. r. Safety. s. Testing and inspecting requirements. t. Required performance results. u. Recording requirements. v. Protection of construction and personnel. w. Review material selection. x. Fabrication and installation procedures. y. Coordination of involved trades.

4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Weekly Progress Meetings:

1. General: COTR will conduct progress meetings bi-weekly at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. Progress meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as coordination and special pre-installation



meetings. Additionally, discussions will address administrative and technical issues of concern, determining resolutions, and development of deadlines for resolution within allowable time frames.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes.

2. Attendees: As may be required by COTR, in addition to representatives of the Authority and Contractor, each subcontractor, supplier, Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:.

1) Safety and Security. 2) Interface requirements. 3) Time. 4) Sequence of operations. 5) Status of submittals. 6) Deliveries. 7) Off-site fabrication. 8) Storage Areas 9) Access. 10) Site utilization. 11) Requests for information. 12) Submittals. 13) Noncompliance notices. 14) Temporary facilities and controls. 15) Work hours. 16) Resource allocation. 17) Hazards and risks. 18) Progress cleaning. 19) Quality and work standards. 20) Contract Modifications. 21) Documentation of information for payment requests. 22) Preparation of Record Documents.

4. Submit at the bi-weekly progress meeting, a two-week look-ahead schedule. This schedule shall include a four-week period, two weeks showing actual progress from the previous two weeks and two weeks showing planned work for the two weeks after the meeting date. Include in the schedule all activities in sufficient detail as approved by



COTR. A two-week look-ahead schedule form will be distributed at the pre-construction conference. Submit a list of subcontractors identifying dates of when subcontractors will be on-site or off-site. A form for this information will be provided by COTR.

5. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Schedule Update Meetings:

1. Conduct schedule update meetings before submittal of Contractor's Application for Payment. Determine where each activity is, in relation to Contractor's CPM Schedule. Ensure the incorporation of all changes made to the sequence of work and all change notices issued by the Contracting Officer. Submit the narrative and information specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" if applicable.

2. Attendees: COTR, Contractor's Project manager or superintendent, the Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and the Authority's representative.

3. Submit the updated schedule, as bilaterally agreed on, along with the Application for Payment.

4. Present delay claims for discussion and, when possible, resolution.






SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for various CPM schedules and reports required for proper performance of the Work.

B. All costs incurred by Contractor to correctly implement and update the schedule shall be borne by Contractor and are part of this Contract.

C. Schedules required include the following: 1. Submittals Schedule. 2. Schedule of Tests and Inspections. 3. Record, As-Built CPM Schedule.

D. Reports required include the following:

1. Daily Construction Reports. 2. Field Correction Reports. 3. Special Reports. 4. Monthly Progress Reports. 5. Contractor Quality Control Reports.

E. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Application for Payment" for Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for Project meeting

minutes. 3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for test and inspection reports. 4. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for Product List.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: The fundamental unit of work in a Project plan and schedule. Each activity has defined geographical boundaries and a detailed estimate of resources required to construct the task. Each activity is assigned a unique description, activity number, activity codes, and dollar value.

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1


B. CPM Network: The structure of the schedule. The network is the representation that defines the construction logic in terms of all the activities with their logical dependencies.

C. Contract CPM Schedule: A cost-loaded CPM schedule covering the entire Contract Duration from the Notice to Proceed through Final Acceptance of the Work.

D. Contract Duration/Time: The total time, in calendar days identified in Section III, "Schedule," representing the duration necessary for completion of all physical and administrative requirements under this Contract and any authorized extension thereof.

E. Critical Path: The critical path is the longest connected chain of interdependent activities in a CPM network that impacts the completion of the Project.

F. Excusable Delay: An unforeseeable delay, beyond the control of Contractor, experienced due to no fault or negligence by Contractor, its subcontractors, or suppliers.

G. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

H. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities shall equal the total Contract Price, unless otherwise approved by COTR.

I. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

J. Total Float: The amount of time an activity can be delayed from its earliest start date without delaying the end of Project.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Authority or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

1.4 PLANNING

A. The total Contract Duration and intermediate milestones if applicable, as indicated in Section III, "Schedule," are the Contract requirements.

B. Contractor shall prepare a practical work plan to complete the Work within the Contract Duration, and complete those portions of work relating to each intermediate milestone date and other Contract requirements. Contractor shall generate a computerized cost-loaded CPM schedule in Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) format for the Work.

C. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of COTR approval of the Schedule.

D. Failure of Contractor to comply with requirements of this Section may be considered cause for withholding progress payments or termination for default.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Contractor shall provide all schedule submittals on printouts and email

B. Daily Progress Report: Submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon on the day following the date of actual progress.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site, coordinate with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," and submit duplicate copies to COTR by noon of the day following day of actual progress:

1. List of subcontractors (by trade group) at the site. 2. List of separate contractors at the site. 3. Approximate count of personnel (by trade group) at the site. 4. Equipment (by trade group) at the site. 5. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 6. Accidents (refer to accident reports). 7. Meetings and significant decisions. 8. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 9. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 10. Meter readings and similar recordings. 11. Emergency procedures. 12. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 13. Change Notices/Directives and Contract Modifications received, implemented. 14. Services connected, disconnected. 15. Equipment or system tests and startups. 16. Partial Completions, occupancies. 17. Substantial Completions authorized. 18. Material deliveries.

3.2 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. When an event of unusual or significant nature occurs at the site, prepare and submit a special report. List the chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, an evaluation of the results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise COTR in advance when such events are known or predictable.

1. Include tabular CPM reports, time-scaled logic diagrams, resource curves and histograms, and narratives as requested by COTR.



B. Submit special reports directly to COTR within seven calendar days of an occurrence. Submit a copy to other parties affected by the occurrence.

3.3 DELAYS AND REQUESTS FOR EXTENSION OF TIME

A. The determination for an extension of the Contract Time will be made by the Contracting Officer according to the Contract Provision "Default."

B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that delays in activities, irrespective of the party causing the delay, which according to the computer mathematical analysis do not affect any critical activity or milestone dates on the CPM network at the time of the delay, shall not become the basis for an extension of the Contract Time. The only basis for any extension of time will be the demonstrated impact of an excusable delay on the critical path. In demonstrating such impact, Contractor shall provide adequate detail as required by the Contract, and Contractor shall prove that:

1. An event occurred. 2. Contractor was not responsible for the event in that the event was beyond the control of

Contractor, and was without fault or negligence of Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier, and the event was unforeseeable.

3. The event was the type for which an excuse is granted according to the "Default" provision of this Contract.

4. Activities on the critical path of the Work were delayed. 5. The event in fact caused the delay of the Work. 6. The requested additional time is an appropriate and reasonable extension of the Contract

Time, given the actual delay encountered.

C. Time Extensions for Unusually Severe Weather:

1. If unusually severe weather conditions are the basis for a request for an extension of the Contract Time, such request shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the critical activities of the scheduled construction.

2. The schedule of anticipated adverse weather below will constitute the base line for monthly (or a prorated portion thereof) weather/time evaluation by the Contracting Officer. On issuance of the Notice to Proceed and continuing throughout the Contract on a monthly basis, actual adverse weather days will be recorded by Contractor on a calendar day basis (include weekends and holidays) and compared to the monthly anticipated adverse weather days set forth below.

a. For purposes of this clause, the term "actual adverse weather days" shall include days that can be demonstrated to have been impacted by adverse weather.

b. Monthly Anticipated Adverse Weather Calendar Days:

1) January - 7. 2) February - 5. 3) March - 6. 4) April - 6.



5) May - 8. 6) June - 6. 7) July - 6. 8) August - 7. 9) September - 5. 10) October - 5. 11) November - 5. 12) December - 6.

c. The number of actual adverse weather days shall be calculated chronologically from the first to the last day in each month. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for time extension based on adverse weather unless the number of actual adverse weather days exceeds the number of anticipated adverse weather days, and unless such adverse weather days prevent work for 50 percent or more of Contractor's workday. In preparing the Contract Schedule, Contractor shall reflect the above anticipated adverse weather days on all weather-dependent activities. Weather-caused delays shall not result in any additional compensation to Contractor.

3. On days where adverse weather is encountered, Contractor shall list all critical activities under progress and shall indicate the impact adverse weather had, if any, on the progress of such activities. This information shall be presented at the end of the adverse weather day to COTR or its authorized representative for its review and approval.

4. If Contractor is found eligible for an extension of the Contract Time, the Contracting Officer will issue a modification extending the time for Contract completion. The extension of time will be made on a calendar day basis.

D. Required Submittals:

1. Provide time-impact analysis that illustrates impact during update period in which event occurred, that event has been mitigated to greatest possible extent, and that event still impacts overall completion of Project.

2. Include with request, two copies of submittal of impacted schedule, in electronic format, and photocopies of all relevant documents that support the claim.

3. Submit all required items within the following time periods:

a. 10 calendar days of event occurrence. b. 10 calendar days of Contractor's knowledge of impact. c. 14 calendar days of written request by COTR.

4. Expiration of time periods without submittal shall constitute forfeiture of rights for these specific impacts.

3.4 RECORD SCHEDULE

A. After all Contract work items are complete, and as a condition of final payment, Contractor shall submit three copies of a Record, As-Built CPM Schedule showing actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. These schedule submittals shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 END OF SECTION 013200



SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs

2. Construction progress photographs.

3. Final Completion construction photographs.


1. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for submitting construction photographs. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting photographs as Project Record

Documents at Project closeout.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Construction Photographs: Submit electronic files of photographs with five days of taking photographs.

1. Submit electronic files of photographs in .jpg format. Identify name of project, date photographs were taken and location of photograph. Identify direction (by compass point) for each photograph.

1.4 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights to the Authority for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

A.

PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PHOTOGRAPHS, GENERAL

A. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph.

B. Field Office Files: Retain one set of electronic files of preconstruction photographs in the field office at Project site and equipment to view the photographs, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to COTR.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Preconstruction Photographs: Take photographs of each area where work is to be performed, including manholes. Take photographs of surface conditions where excavation is to be performed.

B. Construction Progress Photographs: Take photographs of significant construction progress monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Take photographs of all work before concealment in walls, ceilings, floors, slabs and burial in earth or coverage by landscape and hardscape.

C. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take photographs of each area where work has been performed, including vaults, manholes and within electrical equipment enclosures. Take photographs of equipment nameplates, panel schedules and equipment identification labels. Take photographs of restored surfaces where excavation was performed.


PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.


1. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting warranties. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,

Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Divisions 26 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires COTR's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require COTR's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: COTR will provide electronic copies of CADD electronic files of the drawings for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that requires sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Without change to the Contract Duration, COTR reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

SUBMITTALS 013300 - 1


C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Contractor's Responsibilities: Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and submission of all submittals. Submit to COTR all required Submittals. The COTR will forward submittals to the appropriate parties for review.

E. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on COTR’s receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including re-submittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. COTR will advise Contractor when a submittal processed must be delayed for coordination. Allow an additional 45 calendar days for submittals related to fire-protection systems.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Re-submittal Review: Allow 15 calendar days for review of each re-submittal. 4. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit

submittals to COTR enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. Processing of incomplete or unacceptable submissions by COTR shall not reduce the number of calendar days specified above for COTR's review. Resubmissions shall be treated the same as initial submissions relative to review time.

5. Notations on submittals that increase the Contract cost or time of completion shall be brought to COTR's attention before proceeding with the Work.

F. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by COTR and Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Contract name and number. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect/Engineer. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor, if applicable. f. Name and address of supplier, if applicable. g. Name of manufacturer, if applicable. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a dash and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000-001 or 070150.19-001). Re-submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another dash (e.g., 061000-001-A or 070150.19-001-A).

i. Alphanumeric project Identifier. Identifier is shown on the Project Drawings cover sheet.



j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Transmittal number. n. Allow 15 calendar days for processing each re-submittal.

G. Resubmissions: Re-submittal procedure shall follow the same procedures and same number as the initial submittal with the following exceptions:

1. Transmittal shall contain the same information as the first transmittal and the submission number shall indicate second, third, etc., submission. The drawing number/description shall be identical to the initial submission and the date shall be the revised date for that submission.

2. No new material shall be included on the same transmittal for a resubmission. 3. COTR rejection shall not warrant a claim by Contractor for additional time or cost.

H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Where significant deviations from the Contract requirements exist, follow the guidelines set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for substitutions.

I. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless COTR observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Additional copies submitted for Operations and Maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned.

J. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to COTR using the approved transmittal form provided by COTR. COTR will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Use transmittal forms and follow other submittal procedures according to information provided to Contractor at the preconstruction meeting.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

1. Bear all costs incurred for such reproduction and distribution. Prints of all reviewed Shop Drawings may be made from transparencies that carry the appropriate review stamps.

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating “approved” by COTR in connection with construction.

1.5 SUBMITTAL LOG

A. Prepare a log that contains a complete listing of all submittals required by Contract. Submit the log at the preconstruction meeting along with Contractor's construction schedule specified in



Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." Organize the submittal log by Section number. Assign each submittal a sequential number for identification and tracking purposes.

1. Coordinate the submittal log with Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." The submittal log shall be submitted for COTR's review. Include the following information:

a. Title of submittal/description. b. Submittal number (sequential). c. Scheduled date for the first submittal. d. Drawing number, if applicable. e. Applicable Section number. f. Name of subcontractor/vendor. g. Scheduled date of COTR's final release or approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. f. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. g. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. h. Application of testing agency labels and seals. i. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit six copies, in addition to the number of copies to be returned

to Contractor. Provide one additional copy for submittals related to fire-protection system.

6. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.



1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit one reproducible transparency and two black-line prints of each submittal. Provide one additional black-line print for items related to fire-protection systems. COTR will return the marked up reproducible transparency for Contractor’s distribution.

a. Both the reproducible transparency and the prints shall bear Contractor's approval stamp on each sheet.

D. Coordination Drawings:

1. Coordination Drawings are Shop Drawings prepared by Contractor that detail the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

2. Submit Coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.

E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

H. Contractor Warranty Letter: Comply with requirements in Contract Provision "Warranty of Construction." Provide the dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact information for warranty service.

I. Special Warranty Letters: Provide dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact information for warranty service for special warranties required in Division 02 through 33 Sections.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.



1. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. COTR will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. An officer shall sign certificates and certifications or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.

D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements.

E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.

F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.

H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

I. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

J. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

K. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer.

L. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:



1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement on whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

M. Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of the coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any and term of coverage.

N. Manufacturers' warranties.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to COTR.

1. In checking Shop Drawings and Product Data, verify all dimensions and field conditions and check and coordinate Shop Drawings and Product Data of any Section or trade with the requirements of other sections or trades as related thereto, as required for proper and complete installation of the Work.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents, which shall include dimensions, clearances, compatibility, and coordination with Shop Drawings and Product Data submitted for other work.

C. If Contractor has not checked the submittals carefully, even though stamped as checked and approved, submittals shall be returned to Contractor for proper checking before further processing or review by COTR regardless of any urgency claimed by Contractor. In such a situation, Contractor will be responsible for any resulting delays to the scheduled Contract completion. Furthermore, Contracting Officer may hold Contractor responsible for increased Authority costs resulting from Contractor's failure to comply with the requirements set forth herein.

3.2 COTR’S ACTION

A. General: COTR will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.



B. COTR Responsibilities: The review of Shop Drawings and other submittals by COTR will be for general conformance with the Contract only, and the review shall not be interpreted as a checking of detailed dimensions, quantities, or approval of deviations from the Contract Documents. COTR review shall not relieve Contractor of its responsibility for accuracy of Shop Drawings nor for the furnishing and installation of materials or equipment according to the Contract requirements.

1. Approval of Shop Drawings or other submittals is not to be interpreted as approval of a substitute material. Approval of substitutions will be accomplished according to requirements set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

C. Action Submittals: COTR will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. COTR will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" to be used at Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress.

1. Approved: Means fabrication/installation may be undertaken. Approval does not authorize changes to the Contract Price or the Contract Time.

2. Approved as Corrected: Same as "Approved," providing Contractor complies with corrections noted on submittal. Resubmission required only if Contractor is unable to comply with noted corrections.

3. Revise and Resubmit: Fabrication and/or installation may not be undertaken. Make appropriate revisions and resubmit, limiting corrections to items marked.

4. Rejected: Submittal does not comply with requirements. Fabrication and/or installation may not be undertaken. Prepare a new submittal according to requirements and submit without delay.

D. Informational Submittals: COTR will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it, if it does not comply with requirements. COTR will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

E. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.




SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section “Submittals” for process required to submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan.

2. Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation” for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections.

3. Division 01 “Project Management and Coordination” 4. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” 5. Divisions 26 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor to provide and maintain an effective Quality-Control Program that complies with this Section and with requirements of the "Contract Provisions," Section VII, "Inspection of Construction and Final Inspection and Acceptance."

2. Establish a QC Program that consists of the following:

a. QC Organization b. QC Plan c. QC Plan Meeting d. Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting e. QC meetings f. Phases of Control g. Submittal review and approval h. Operation & Maintenance data and Warranty receipt verification prior to product

delivery i. Material verification at delivery j. Testing, completion inspections, and QC certifications and documentation

necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations that comply with the requirements of this Contract.

3. Contractor is not responsible for Special Inspections according to requirements of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (USBC). The Authority’s agent shall provide these Special Inspection services. Special Inspections coordination should be

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1


discussed at weekly progress meetings and scheduled dates for Special Inspections carried on the two-week look ahead. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of and notification to the Authority for the following Special Inspections.

a. Special inspections are required for, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

1) Steel construction. 2) Concrete construction. 3) Masonry construction. 4) Foundation systems including concrete footings of buildings three stories or

less in height which are fully supported on earth or rock. 5) Prepared fill requirements.

4. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that require those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

5. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of its responsibilities for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

6. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

7. The provisions of this Section shall not limit requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by the Authority or other agencies having jurisdiction.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

a. ASTM C 1077 Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use

in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation latest edition. b. ASTM D 3666 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting

Road and Paving Materials latest edition. c. ASTM D 3740 Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing

and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction latest edition.

d. ASTM E 329 Agencies engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction latest edition. ASTM E 543 Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing latest edition.

e. ASTM E 543 Agencies performing Nondestructive Testing latest edition.

2. METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORT AUTHORITY



a. Construction Safety Manual, most current edition

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality: Conformance to the requirements established by the contract specifications and drawings.

B. Control: To guide and have influence over.

C. Contractor Quality Control (CQC): The construction contractor’s system to manage, control, and document their own, their supplier’s, and their subcontractor’s activities to comply with the contract requirements.

D. Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR). Primary on-site representative of the Contracting Officer for technical matters. Duties and responsibilities of the COTR will be transmitted to the contractor via letter from the Contracting Officer.

E. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed by the Authority before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirement. Additionally, the Authority fulfills its responsibility to be certain that the CQC is functioning and the specified end product is achieved.

F. Experienced: When used with an entity, “experienced” means having successfully completed a minimum of 10 projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Specific experience requirements enumerated in these specifications supersede this requirement.

1.5 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the COTR for a decision before proceeding. This paragraph refers to industry and government standards. In case of a difference between drawings and the specifications, the specifications shall govern.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following in accordance with Division 01 Section, "Submittals."

1. Action Submittals.

a. Quality Control (QC) Plan.

B. NOTE: Coordinate the submittal requirement dates with the submittal dates in Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation”.



C. Submit a QC plan within 20 calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. The QC Plan shall include a preliminary submittal of the list of definable features of work that shall cover the first 90 calendar days of construction.

1. Submit at this time résumés of key personnel to be assigned to this contract and the limits of their authority. Show how this project management structure fits into the Contractor’s corporate management structure.

D. Any approval by the COTR of the QC Plan shall be treated as “accepted, predicated upon successful implementation.” Stop work if the QC Plan becomes disapproved. The exception is the work authorized in the paragraph entitled "Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval," shall stop.

1.7 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER

A. Provide a sample copy set of report forms to the Contracting Officer during the Pre-Construction Conference. The report forms shall consist of the Quality Control Daily Report, Preparatory Phase Report, Initial Phase Report, and Project Quality Control Monthly Summary. These forms may be edited to support the project. Other reports referenced below may be in formats customarily used by the Contractor, Testing Laboratories, etc. and shall contain the information required by this specification.

B. Deliver the following listed items to the COTR at the times specified:

1. Quality Control Daily Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed.

2. Superintendent’s Daily Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

3. Material Receiving Inspection Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

4. Preparatory Phase Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

5. Initial Phase Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, turned in by the next calendar day after work is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

6. Field Test Reports: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, within 2 working days after the test is performed, do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

7. Monthly Summary Report of Tests: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, do not attach to a Quality Control Daily Report.

8. Project Quality Control Monthly Summary Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, do not attach to a Quality Control Daily Report.

9. Inspection Log and Signoff Sheets: one copy, submitted daily within 1 day of the inspection.

10. Testing Plan and Log: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, submitted within 2 working days of the end of the month.

11. Deficiency List: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, submitted to the COTR weekly. 12. Monthly Deficiency Report: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, within two working days

of the end of the month. 13. QC Meeting Minutes: 1 Original electronic or hard copy, within 2 working days after the

meeting.



14. QC Certifications: As required by paragraph entitled "QC Certifications."

1.8 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. Establish and maintain a QC Program as described in this Section. The QC Program consists of but is not limited to the following:

1. QC Organization. 2. QC Plan. 3. QC Plan Meeting. 4. Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting 5. QC meetings. 6. Phases of Control. 7. Submittal review and approval. 8. Operations and Maintenance data. 9. Warranty receipt verification prior to product delivery. 10. Material verification at delivery. 11. Testing. 12. Completion inspections. 13. QC certifications and documentation necessary to provide materials, equipment,

workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations that comply with the requirements of this Contract.

14. The QC Program shall cover on-site and off-site work and shall be keyed to the work sequence.

15. No work or testing may be performed unless the QCM or a pre-approved alternate is on the work site.

16. The QCM shall report to an officer of the firm and shall not be subordinate to the Project Superintendent or the Project Manager.

17. Quality Control Manager is the primary individual responsible for quality control. The QCM, Project Superintendent and Project Manager shall be responsible for the quality of work on the job. Project Superintendent shall be held responsible for the quality of production.

B. Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval

1. The only work that is authorized to proceed prior to the approval of the QC Plan is mobilization of storage and office trailers, temporary utilities, and surveying.

C. Approval

1. Approval of the QC Plan is required prior to the start of any construction. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC Plan and operations as necessary, including but not limited to removal of personnel, to ensure the specified quality of work. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in order to verify the submitted qualifications. All QC organization personnel shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may require the removal of any individual for non-compliance with quality requirements specified in the contract.

D. Notification of Changes



1. Notify the COTR, in writing, of any proposed change, including changes in the QC organization personnel, a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a proposed change. Proposed changes shall be subject to acceptance by the Contracting Officer.

1.9 QC ORGANIZATION

A. Staffing Levels: Provide sufficient qualified quality-control personnel to monitor each work activity at all times. Scheduling and coordinating of all inspections and testing shall match the type and pace of work activity.

1. In cases where multiple trades, disciplines, or subcontractors are on site at same time, each activity shall be tested and inspected by personnel skilled in that portion of the work.

2. In cases where multiple shifts are employed, the quality-control staff shall be increased as required to monitor the work on each shift.

B. The following positions are key personnel as defined by the Authority in this and other Division 01 Specification Sections.

1. Project Superintendent

a. Qualifications: 15 years of experience, with five years experience in a supervisory role coordinating various trades at multiple work areas.

2. Quality Control Manager (QCM)

a. Duties

1) Provide a QCM at the work site to implement and manage the QC Program. In addition to implementing and managing the QC Program, the QCM may perform the duties of project superintendent. The QCM is required to attend the QC Plan Meeting, attend the Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, conduct the QC meetings, perform the Phases Control, perform submittal review and approval, ensure testing is performed and provide QC certifications and documentation required in this Contract. The QCM is responsible for managing and coordinating the Phases Control and documentation performed by the Testing Laboratory personnel and any other inspection and testing personnel required by this Contract.

b. Qualifications

1) An individual with a minimum of 5 years experience as a superintendent, inspector, QCM, project manager, project engineer or construction manager on similar size and type construction contracts which included the major trades that are part of this Contract. The individual shall be familiar with the requirements of the Construction Safety Manual, and have experience in the area of hazard identification and safety compliance. The QCM shall be interviewed by PMC QA Department and the COTR. The COTR will approve the QC Manager.

c. Construction Quality Management Training



1) In addition to the above experience and education requirements, the QCM shall have completed the course entitled "Construction Quality Management for Contractors." If the QCM does not have a current certification, they shall obtain the CQM course certification within 60 - calendar days of award. This short course is periodically offered in alternate months by: (1) the Maryland Chapter, Associated General Contractors (AGC), 410-321-7870; [email protected] and by (2) the Virginia Chapter, Associated Builders and Contractors (ABC), 703-968-6205, [email protected]; [email protected]. The training uses Army Corps of Engineers course content. The course is facilitated by instructors from Army Corps of Engineers, North Atlantic Division, Baltimore District, and by instructors from the Naval Facilities Engineering Command, Engineering Field Activity Chesapeake.

3. Alternate QCM Duties and Qualifications

a. Designate an alternate for the QCM at the work site to serve in the event of the designated QCM's absence. The period of absence may not exceed two weeks at one time, and not more than 30 workdays during a calendar year. The qualification requirements for the Alternate QCM shall be the same as for the QCM.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL (QC) PLAN

A. Provide, for approval by the COTR, a QC plan submitted in a 3-ring binder with pages numbered sequentially that covers both on-site and off-site work and includes but may not necessarily be limited to the following:

B. A table of contents listing the major sections identified with tabs in the following order:

1. QC ORGANIZATION 2. PERSONNEL MATRIX 3. NAMES AND QUALIFICATIONS 4. DUTIES, RESPONSIBILITY AND AUTHORITY OF QC PERSONNEL 5. APPOINTMENT LETTERS 6. OUTSIDE ORGANIZATIONS INCLUDING BOCA INSPECTION COMPANIES 7. TESTING LABORATORY INFORMATION AND CERTIFICATIONS 8. TESTING PLAN AND LOG 9. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES AND INITIAL SUBMITTAL REGISTER 10. LIST OF DEFINABLE FEATURES 11. PROCEDURES FOR PERFORMING THE PHASES OF CONTROL 12. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 13. DOCUMENTATION PROCEDURES 14. PROCEDURES TO COMPLETE REWORK ITEMS 15. PROCEDURES FOR COMPLETION INSPECTION 16. FORMS 17. ATTACHMENTS

C. A chart showing the QC organizational structure.



D. A personnel matrix showing for each Section of the specification who shall review and approve submittals, who shall perform and document the Phases Control, and who shall perform and document the testing.

E. Names and qualifications, in résumé format, for each person in the QC organization. Include the CQM course certifications for the QCM and Alternate QCM as required by the paragraphs entitled "Construction Quality Management Training" and "Alternate QCM Duties and Qualifications".

F. Duties, responsibilities and authority of each person in the QC organization.

G. Letters signed by an officer of the firm appointing the QCM and Alternate QCM and stating that they are responsible for implementing and managing the QC Program as described in this contract. Include in this letter the responsibility of the QCM and Alternate QCM to implement and manage the three phases of quality control, and their authority to stop work that is not in compliance with the contract. The QCM shall issue letters of direction to all other QC specialists outlining their duties, authorities, and responsibilities. Copies of the letters shall be included in the QC plan.

H. A listing of outside organizations such as, architectural and consulting engineering firms that will be employed by the Contractor and a description of the services these firms will provide.

I. Testing laboratory information required by the paragraphs entitled "Accreditation Requirements" or "Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements", as applicable.

J. A Testing Plan and Log that includes the tests required, referenced by the specification paragraph number requiring the test, the frequency, the desired results and the person responsible for each test and shall be identified as a scheduled (CPM) activity.

K. Procedures for reviewing, approving and managing submittals. Provide the name(s) of the person(s) in the QC organization authorized to review and certify submittals prior to approval. Provide the initial submittal of the Submittal Register as specified in Section entitled "Submittals."

L. List of definable features of work. The list shall be cross-referenced to the contractor's Construction Schedule and the specification sections. For projects requiring a Progress Chart, the list of definable features of work shall include but not be limited to all items of work on the schedule. For projects requiring a Network Analysis Schedule, the list of definable features of work shall include but not be limited to all critical path activities. Include a chart of common deficiencies for the Definable Feature of work. Detail the control procedures that shall be employed to eliminate this common deficiency.

M. Procedures for Performing the Phases of Control. The contractor shall develop a plan for incorporating each of the control phases into the work. The plan shall detail who shall be responsible for scheduling the phases, conducting the phase as well as documenting the phase. The use of project specific forms may be helpful. However, the entire plans and specifications establish the quality and not just the checklists. The Preparatory and Initial Phases and meetings shall be conducted with a view towards obtaining quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature of work.



N. Include all activities for which this specification requires QC specialists or Specialty Inspection Personnel, and for any specific definable features of work as identified in the QC Plan.

O. Documentation procedures, including proposed report formats.

P. Procedures to identify, record, track and complete rework items.

Q. Procedures for Identifying and Documenting the Completion Inspection process. Include in these procedures the responsible party for punch out inspection, pre-final inspection, and final acceptance inspection.

R. A complete set of report forms to be utilized on this project.

S. All applicable subcontractors and suppliers Quality Control Plans complete with Contactor’s CQC planned involvement.

1.11 PHASES OF CONTROL

A. The Phases of Control shall adequately cover both on-site and off-site work and shall include the following for each definable feature of work.

B. Material Receiving Inspection: Contractor shall establish a formal material receiving inspection program to verify material compliance to approved Shop Drawings, approved submittals, and the contract plans and specifications.

C. Preparatory Phase: Notify the COTR at least 2 workdays in advance of each preparatory phase. This phase shall include a meeting conducted by the QCM and attended by the superintendent, and the foreman responsible for the definable feature. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions in the daily Quality Control Daily Report and in the Preparatory Phase Report. As a minimum the following should be covered prior to beginning work on each definable feature of work:

1. Review each paragraph of the applicable specification sections. 2. Review the project drawings. 3. Verify that appropriate shop drawings, O & M data, Warranties, and submittals for

materials and equipment have been submitted and approved. Verify receipt of approved factory test results, when required.

4. Establish control to be utilized to assure work complies with the contract plans and specifications.

5. Review the testing plan and ensure that provisions have been made to provide the required QC testing.

6. Examine the work area to ensure that the required preliminary work has been completed. 7. Examine the required materials, equipment and sample work to ensure that they are on

hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and submitted data. 8. Discuss construction methods, construction tolerances, workmanship standards, and the

approach that shall be used to provide quality construction by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable feature of work.

9. Review the safety plan and appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met, and that required Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted.



D. Initial Phase: Notify the COTR at least 2 workdays in advance of each initial phase. When construction crews are ready to start work on a definable feature of work, conduct the initial phase with the superintendent, and the foreman responsible for that definable feature of work. Observe the initial segment of the definable feature of work to ensure that the work complies with Contract requirements. Document the results of the initial phase in the daily Quality Control Daily Report and in the Initial Phase Report. Repeat the initial phase for each new crew to work on-site, or when acceptable levels of specified quality are not being met. As a minimum the following should be covered for each definable feature of work:

1. Ensure controls established during Preparatory Phase are adequate to allow work to proceed in compliance with the plans and specifications.

2. Establish the quality of workmanship required. 3. Resolve conflicts. 4. Ensure that testing is performed. 5. Check work procedures for compliance with the Safety Plan and the appropriate activity

hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety requirements are met.

E. Follow-Up Phase: Perform the following for on-going work daily, or more frequently as necessary until the completion of each definable feature of work and document in the daily Quality Control Daily Report:

1. Ensure the work is in compliance with Contract requirements. 2. Maintain the quality of workmanship required. 3. Ensure that testing is performed. 4. Ensure that rework items are being corrected. 5. Perform safety inspections.

F. Code-Required Inspections:

1. Comply with current edition approved by the Commonwealth of Virginia of the USBC, "Special Inspections” or other agencies having jurisdiction. Special Inspections are to be performed by the Authority’s agent. Perform and document all tests, inspections, notifications to the Authority, coordination with the Authority’s agent and other activities listed in the USBC or other agencies having jurisdiction.

2. Notice to COTR: Notify COTR, in writing, at least 48 hours in advance of all code-required inspections. COTR should be apprised in advance of every preparatory and initial inspection. All preparatory, initial, and follow-up inspections shall be made a matter of record in Contractor's quality-control documentation.

G. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases

1. Additional Preparatory and Initial Phases shall be conducted on the same definable features of work if the quality of on-going work is unacceptable, if there are changes in the applicable QC organization, if there are changes in the on-site production supervision or work crew, if work on a definable feature is resumed after substantial period of inactivity, or if other problems develop as directed by the COTR in writing.

H. Notification of Phases of Control for Off-Site Work

1. On determination by COTR that an item shall require surveillance by the Authority at the point of production, manufacture, or shipment, Contractor shall be notified, in writing, of



such determination. Contractor shall furnish to COTR three copies of all purchase orders or subcontracts, for all tiers of subcontractors or suppliers for each item. In addition, copies of documented quality-control operations, tests, and inspections shall be made available to the Authority's representative at the point of production, manufacture, or shipment. The CQC shall notify the COTR at least two weeks prior to the start of the preparatory and initial phases.

1.12 SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND APPROVAL

A. Procedures for submission, review and approval of submittals are described in Division 01 Section “Submittals”.

1.13 TESTING

A. Except as stated otherwise in the technical specification sections, perform sampling and testing required under this Contract.

B. Independent Testing Laboratory: When tests are required by the plans or specifications, or by codes, a corporately and financially independent testing organization that can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of equipment, or systems evaluated by the testing organization shall be contracted by the Contractor to perform the contractually required tests. The various types of independent laboratories and their requirements are listed below:

C. Accreditation Requirements: Construction materials testing laboratories performing work for Authority construction contracts shall be accredited by one of the laboratory accreditation authorities. The laboratory's scope of accreditation shall include the ASTM standards listed in the paragraph titled "Construction Materials Testing Laboratory Requirements" as appropriate to the testing field. The policy applies to the specific laboratory performing the actual testing, not just the "Corporate Office".

D. Electrical testing of components, equipment and systems: The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices, installations, and systems. The testing firm shall have at least five years experience in the testing of electrical equipment of the type, rating, and voltage used on this Project. The testing laboratories shall be a current full-member company of the International Electrical Testing Association (http://www.neta.org/). This independent testing firm shall perform duties as required under the terms of this Contract.

E. Test Results: Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures used. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. If the item fails to conform, notify COTR immediately. Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the specification requirements, whichever is applicable. A testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports shall sign test results. Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and other documentation to the COTR via the QCM. Furnish a summary report of field tests at the end of each month

F. Test Reports and Monthly Summary Report of Tests:


http://www.neta.org/


1. The QCM shall furnish the signed reports, certifications, and a summary report of field tests at the end of each month to the COTR.

1.14 QC CERTIFICATIONS

A. Quality Control Daily Report Certification

1. Each Quality Control Daily Report shall contain the following statement:

a. “On behalf of (Name of Contractor), I certify that this report and the Inspector's Daily Reports are complete and correct, and that all materials and equipment used, as well as work performed during this reporting period are in compliance with Drawings, Specifications, and Contract provisions, except as noted in this report or attached reports.”

B. Application for Payment Certification

1. Refer to Division 01 Section "Application for Payment" for address to which the Applications shall be sent.

C. Completion Certification:

1. Upon completion of work under this Contract, the QCM shall furnish a certificate to the Contracting Officer attesting that "the work has been completed, inspected, tested and is in compliance with the Contract."

1.15 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS

A. Punch-Out Inspection: Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a completion time stated in the Contract Clause entitled "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work," or stated elsewhere in the specifications, the QCM shall conduct an inspection of the work and develop a "punch list" of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications. Include in the punch list any remaining items on the "Rework Items List" which were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out Inspection. The punch list shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. A copy of the punch list shall be provided to the COTR. The QCM or staff shall make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished the Contractor shall notify the COTR that the facility is ready for the Authority "Pre-Final Inspection."

B. Pre-Final Inspection: The Authority will perform this inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. An Authority "Pre-Final Punch List" may be developed as a result of this inspection. The QCM shall ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior to notifying the Authority that a "Final" inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection shall be corrected in timely manner and shall be accomplished before the contract completion date for the work or any particular increment thereof if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.

C. Final Acceptance Inspection: The QCM, the superintendent or other primary contractor management personnel shall be in attendance at this inspection. The COTR will be in



attendance at this inspection. Additional Authority personnel may be in attendance. The Contracting Officer based upon results of the “Pre-Final” inspection will formally schedule the final acceptance inspection. Notice shall be given to the COTR at least 14 calendar days prior to the final inspection stating that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor, as being unacceptable, along with all the remaining work performed under the contract, shall be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all contract work acceptably complete for this inspection shall be cause for the Contracting Officer to bill the Contractor for the Authority's additional inspection cost in accordance with the clause in the Contract Provisions entitled "Inspection of Construction." When the Contracting Officer takes possession of partially completed work, it shall be in accordance with clause in the Contract Provisions entitled "Use and Possession Prior to Completion".

1.16 DOCUMENTATION

A. Contractor shall maintain current quality control records, on approved forms, of all control activities, production, tests and inspections performed. These records shall include factual evidence that required tests or inspections have been performed, including type and number of tests or inspections involved; results of tests or inspections; nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.; proposed remedial action; and corrective actions taken. These records shall cover both conforming and defective or deficient features (non-conforming) and shall include a statement that all supplies and materials incorporated into the Work are in full compliance with terms of the Contract. Legible copies of these records shall be furnished to COTR daily. The records shall cover all work placed subsequent to the previously furnished records and shall be verified by Contractor's QCM. Contractor shall document tests and inspections as specified in the technical provisions of the Specifications, and these records shall be available for review by COTR throughout the life of the Contract.

B. Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site QC Program operations and activities. Establish and maintain the following in a series of 3 ring binders. Binders shall be divided and tabbed as shown below. These binders shall be readily available to the Authority's Quality Assurance Team during normal business hours.

1. All completed Preparatory and Initial Phase Reports, arranged by specification Section. 2. All milestone inspections, arranged by Activity/Event Number. 3. A current up-to-date copy of the Testing Plan and Log with supporting field test reports,

arranged by specification section. 4. Copies of all contract modifications, arranged in numerical order. Also include

documentation that modified work was accomplished. 5. A current, up-to-date copy, of the Deficiency List.

C. Report Forms - The contractor shall design all forms to be used in the Quality Control Program. A copy of all forms shall be included with the Quality Control Plan. The forms shall be designed to assist in the control of the quality. The following minimum requirements are listed for specific reports:

1. Quality Control Daily Report: Reports are required for each day that work is performed and for every seven consecutive calendar days of no work and on the last day of a no-work period. Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the Contract. The reporting of work shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Quality



Control Daily Reports are to be prepared, signed and dated by the QCM and shall contain the following information:

a. Date of report, report number, Contract Number, and Contract Title. b. Identify Schedule Activity No., Submittal # and list equipment/material received

each day that is incorporated into the job. c. Indicate if Preparatory Phase work was performed today (Yes/No checkboxes). d. If Preparatory Phase work was performed today (including on-site and off-site

work), identify its Schedule Activity Number and Definable Feature of Work. The Index number is a cross reference to the Preparatory Phase Checklist. An example of the Index number is: 0025-P01, where "0025" is the Quality Control Daily Report Number, "P" indicates Preparatory Phase, and "01" is the Preparatory Phase Checklist number(s) for this date. Each entry in this Section shall be accompanied with a corresponding Preparatory Phase Checklist.

e. Indicate if Initial Phase work was performed today (Yes/No checkboxes). f. If Initial Phase work was performed today (including on-site and off-site work),

identify its Schedule Activity Number and Definable Feature of Work. The Index Number is a cross reference to the Initial Phase Checklist. An example of the Index Number is: 0025-I01, where "0025" is the Quality Control Daily Report Number, "I" indicates Initial Phase, and "01" is the Initial Phase Checklist number(s) for this date. Each entry in this Section shall be accompanied with a corresponding Initial Phase Checklist.

g. Results of the Follow-up Phase inspections held today (including on-site and off-site work), including Schedule Activity Number, location of definable feature of work, Specification Sections, etc. Indicate in the report for this definable feature of work that the work complies with the Contract as approved in the Initial Phase, work complies with safety requirements, and that required testing has been performed. Include a list of who performed the tests.

h. List the rework items identified, but not corrected by close of business, along with its associated Schedule Activity Number.

i. List the rework items corrected from the rework items list along with the corrective action taken and its associated Schedule Activity Number.

j. Include a "remarks" section in this report that shall contain pertinent information including but not limited to:

1) Directions received. 2) Quality control problem areas. 3) Deviations from the QC plan. 4) Construction deficiencies encountered. 5) QC meetings held,. 6) Acknowledgement that record drawings, specifications, O & M data, and

Warranty Manuals, have been updated. 7) Corrective direction given by the QC Organization and corrective action

taken by the Contractor. 8) For each remark given, identify the Schedule Activity Number that is

associated with the remark.

k. Quality Control Daily Report certification, signature and date.

2. Preparatory Phase Report: Each Definable Feature of Work that is in the Preparatory Phase shall have this report filled out for it. The report shall be identified by terminology



consistent with the construction schedule. Attach this report to the Quality Control Daily Report of the same date.

a. Specification Section, date of report, and Contract number shall be filled out. Duplicate this information in the header of the second page of the report.

b. Definable Feature of Work, Schedule Activity Number and Index Number entry and format shall match entry in the Preparatory Phase section of the Quality Control Daily Report. Duplicate this information in the header of the second page of the report.

c. Personnel Present: Indicate the number of hours of advance notice that was given to the COTR and indicate (Yes/No checkboxes) whether or not the COTR was notified. Indicate the Names of Preparatory Phase Meeting attendees, their position and their company affiliation.

d. Submittals: Indicate if submittals have been approved (Yes/No checkboxes), if no indicate what has not been submitted. Are materials on hand (Yes/No checkboxes) and if not, what items are missing. Check delivered material/equipment against approved submittals and comment as required.

e. Material Storage: Indicate if materials/equipment is stored properly (Yes/No checkboxes) and if not, what action is/was taken.

f. Specifications: Review and comment on Specification Paragraphs that describe the material/equipment, procedure for accomplishing the work and clarify any differences.

g. Preliminary Work & Permits: Ensure preliminary work is in accordance with the contract documents and necessary permits are on file, if not, describe the action taken.

h. Testing: Identify who performs tests, the frequency, and where tests are to occur. Review the testing plan, report abnormalities, and if the test facilities have been approved.

i. Discuss Control Procedures that shall be employed to consistently obtain the required specified quality.

j. Safety: Indicate if the activity hazard analysis has been approved (Yes/No checkboxes) and comment on the review of the applicable portions of the Construction Safety Manual.

k. Meeting Comments: Note comments and remarks during the Preparatory Phase Meeting that was not addressed in previous sections of this checklist.

l. Other Items or Remarks: Note any other remarks or items that were a result of the Preparatory Phase.

m. QCM shall sign and date the report.

3. Initial Phase Report: Complete this report for each Definable Feature of Work that is in the Initial Phase. The report shall be identified by terminology consistent with the construction schedule. Attach this report to the Quality Control Daily Report of the same date.

a. Specification Section, date of report, and Contract number shall be entered. b. Definable Feature of Work, Schedule Activity Number and Index Number entry

and format shall match entry in the Initial Phase section of the Quality Control Daily Report.

c. Personnel Present: Indicate the number of hours of advance notice that was given to the COTR and indicate (Yes/No checkboxes) whether or not the COTR was notified. Indicate the Names of Initial Phase Meeting attendees, their position and company/Authority they are with.



d. Control Procedures: Comment on control procedures identified at Preparatory Phase of Control and assurance that work is in accordance with plans, specifications and submittals. Control procedures not producing the required compliance shall be adjusted until the procedures consistently obtain the required quality.

e. Preliminary Work: Ensure preliminary work being placed is in compliance and if not, what action is/was taken.

f. Workmanship: Identify where initial work is located; if a sample panel is required (Yes/No checkboxes); is the initial work the sample (Yes/No checkboxes); and if Yes, describe the panel location and precautions taken to preserve the sample.

g. Resolution: Comment on any differences and the resolutions reached. h. Check Safety: Comment on the safety review of the job conditions. i. Other: Note any other remarks or items that were a result of the Initial Phase. j. QCM shall sign and date the report.

D. Testing Log: As tests are performed, the QCM shall record on the "Testing Log" the date the test was conducted, the date the test results were forwarded to the COTR, remarks and acknowledgement that an accredited or Contracting Officer approved testing laboratory was used. Forward a copy of the updated "Testing Plan and Log" on the last day of each month. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

E. Deficiency Log: The QCM shall maintain a list of work that does not comply with the Contract, identifying what items need to be reworked, the date the item was originally discovered, the date the item shall be corrected by, and the date the item was corrected. There is no requirement to report a rework item that is corrected the same day it is discovered. Provide a copy of the deficiency log to the COTR at the weekly progress meeting. The Contractor shall be responsible for including on this list items needing rework including those identified by the COTR.

F. Special Inspection Control Log: Contractor shall maintain a Special Inspection Control Log chronologically recording each Special test and inspection performed under the USBC, or other agencies having jurisdiction on-site, including the nature of the test or inspection, the date performed, the results, causes for rejection, corrective action taken, and dates of subsequent tests and final acceptance.

G. Test Reports: Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system that shall record all tests results. Information on test designation, location, date of test, specification requirements, results and retest results, causes for rejection and recommended remedial actions shall be documented. A copy of the test results shall be sent directly from the Agency performing the testing services to COTR. A copy of any failing report shall be sent immediately. All test reports shall be reviewed and signed by a professional engineer, licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

H. Signoff Sheets: Contractor shall be responsible for establishing a system of signoff sheets certifying that all work required before the construction or startup of critical work elements has been constructed and installed according to the plans and specifications.

I. Monthly Deficiency Report: Contractor shall submit a monthly deficiency report to COTR identifying all substandard tests and inspections taken during the month including the nature of the test or inspection, location and nature of defects, causes for rejection, and remedial actions taken or proposed for any open items on prior deficiency reports including the date scheduled for resolution of the item.



J. Record Drawings: The QCM is required to ensure the record drawings, required by Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the construction drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate modifying documentation (e.g. CN No., Modification No., Request for Information No., etc.). The QCM shall initial each deviation and each revision. Upon completion of work, the QCM shall furnish a certificate attesting to the accuracy of the record drawings prior to submission to the COTR.

K. Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty Manuals: The QCM shall ensure that the Operation and Maintenance data required by Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data” and the Warranties specified in Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” are inserted on a daily basis in the appropriate sections of the approved formatted manuals after they have been approved by the COTR.

L. Materials Receiving Inspection Report: Contractor shall establish a formal materials receiving inspection program to verity material compliance to approved Shop Drawings, approved submittals, and the contract plans and specifications.

1.17 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE

A. The COTR will notify the Contractor of any detected non-compliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer may:

1. Issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall make no part of the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of a claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages.

2. Repair, replace or otherwise remedy the defective work at the Contractor’s expense. Cost incurred by the Authority to correct defective work shall be deducted from the total amount due the Contractor.

3. Withhold an amount from the payment due the Contractor as may be deemed necessary at the discretion of the Contracting Officer.

4. Terminate the Contractor’s right to proceed for Default after providing required notice.

B. In cases where implementation of the Quality Control Program does not comply with the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan or the contract provisions. Or Contractor fails to properly operate and maintain an effective Quality Control Program, the Contracting Officer may:

1. Order the Contractor to replace ineffective or unqualified Quality Control Personnel or subcontractors.

2. Issue an order stopping all or part of the work until acceptable personnel are on site and a new Quality Control Plan is approved by the COTR. The Contractor shall make no part of the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages.

3. Take a credit from the contract for Quality Control Activities not performed. 4. Terminate the Contractors right to proceed for Default after providing required notice.



C. The Contractor shall maintain a detailed record of every non-compliance and corrective action taken.






SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section defines many of the terms used elsewhere in the Construction Documents and lists complete names and telephone numbers for many of the associations and agencies identified elsewhere in the Construction Documents by their acronym.

B. Abbreviations, where not defined in the Contract Documents, will be interpreted by the Contracting Officer to mean the normal construction industry terminology.

C. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of the Contract Documents.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in Sections I and II of the Authority Solicitation Offer and Award. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined generally in this Article. Definitions and explanations contained in this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work to the extent that they may not be stated more explicitly in another element of the Contract Documents.

B. Approve: The term "approved," where used in regard to COTR's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to COTR's duties and responsibilities as delegated by the Contracting Officer in the Contract and Special Provisions.

C. Architect/Engineer: For the purpose of this Project, the "Design Professional of Record." To distinguish from the Contracting Officer and Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR).

D. Authority: Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

E. Award: The acceptance, by the Authority, of the successful offeror's proposal.

F. Award Date: The date on which the Authority gives notice of acceptance to the successful offeror.

G. AOA (or A.O.A.): Air Operations Area. The area of the Airport used or intended to be used for landing, taking off, surface maneuvering, loading, unloading, or servicing aircraft. This security

REFERENCES 014200 - 1


area requires security badging. Workers in this area are required to obtain and display an AOA photo I.D. credential. Drivers in this area are required to obtain an Airport Vehicle Operator's Permit for the Air Operations Area.

H. Beneficial Use: Use by the Authority prior to 100 percent completion and final acceptance.

I. Contract Documents: Documents containing requirements of the Work. These include all Contract provisions and attachments made thereto or referenced therein.

J. Contract Provisions: The administrative and procedural requirements starting at Award Date and ending at Final Acceptance, as provided for in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

K. Contract Time or Duration (Time Limit): The number of calendar days established in Section III, "Schedule," indicating the time allowed for the completion of all physical and administrative work contemplated in the Contract, including any authorized extensions thereto.

L. Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR): The Contracting Officer's designated representative, as defined in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

M. Contractor: Individual, partnership, corporation or joint venture under Contract to the Authority for performance of prescribed Work.

N. Drawings: Erection/installation/construction plans, or any other supplementary plans or similar graphic data, illustrating work to be performed that are provided to Contractor as part of the Contract Documents.

O. Directed: A command or instruction by the Authority. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

P. Final Acceptance: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

Q. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

R. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

S. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

T. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

U. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

V. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.



1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name.

W. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

X. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is indicated.

Y. Punch list Work: Minor corrective actions required to achieve "Final Acceptance." Occurs after "Substantial Completion" of the Work in strict compliance with quality-control requirements.

Z. Roadway: General term denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular travel, including the entire area within the right-of-way.

AA. Special Provisions: For the purpose of this Contract, the directions and requirements provided for in Section VI of the Contract Documents.

BB. Shop Drawings: Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittals."

CC. Specifications: General term comprising all directions, provisions and requirements contained herein, together with any other contractual requirements such as may be added or adopted as the Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, or Supplementary Conditions, all of which are necessary for the proper performance of the Contract.

DD. Substantial Completion: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

EE. Factory-Authorized Service Representative: An authorized representative of a manufacturer who is trained and approved by the manufacturer to inspect and approve the installation of manufacturer’s products and that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and who is authorized by the manufacturer to confirm the issuance of appropriate warranties.

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for additional information regarding conflicting requirements.



1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to COTR for a decision before proceeding.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project shall be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.

E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 http://www.necanet.org/ NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (303) 697-8441 www.netaworld.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 www.nfpa.org (617) 770-3000 www.rfci.com UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (800) 285-4476 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800


http://www.aeic.org/

http://www.ansi.org/

http://www.icea.net/

http://www.iec.ch/

http://www.ieee.org/

http://www.necanet.org/

http://www.nema.org/

http://www.netaworld.org/

http://www.nfpa.org/

http://www.rfci.com/

http://www.ul.com/


B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council (703) 931-4533 (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

USBC The Virginia Statewide Building Code (USBC)

The Commonwealth of Virginia – Uniform Statewide Building Code

(804) 371- 7160

VDHCD Virginia Department of Housing and Community Development Division of Building and Fire Regulation 501 North 2nd Street Richmond, VA 23219-1321

VDOT Virginia Department of Transportation (703) 383-8368 www.virginiadot.org VDEQ Virginia Department of Environmental Quality 1-800-592-5482 www.deq.state.va.us

1.6 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES

A. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the work. Names and addresses are subject to change; they are believed to be but are not assured to be accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

B. Codes: The contractor shall adhere to all applicable portions of code standards and specifications in the construction of the work. Unless otherwise noted (reference Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”), the Authority will review the Contractor’s submittals and


http://www.iccsafe.org/

http://www.icc-es.org/

http://www.virginiadot.org/

http://www.deq.state.va.us/


construction of the work for code compliance. The Authority’s acceptance of completed construction does not relieve the Contractor from strict compliance with all applicable regulations and codes.

1. Definition: The Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority has a “building department”

recognized by the Commonwealth of Virginia. This department is charged with enforcing the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC). Where the words “code official”, “department having jurisdiction” or “agency having jurisdiction” is referenced in any code, including the VUSBC or its adopted model codes (ICC), those terms shall mean the Authority Building Official and/or his designated representative.

2. Standards that influence the construction of the project include, but are not limited to, all applicable federal and Commonwealth laws, all applicable codes, rules, regulations and standards applicable to this project.






SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, security, and protection facilities for Contractor staging area.

B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities. 2. Electric power service. 3. Telephone and other communication services.

C. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Field offices. 2. Storage and fabrication sheds. 3. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. 4. Barricades, warning signs, and lights.

D. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Temporary utilities are available from the Authority at no charge unless otherwise noted. Provide necessary labor and materials to connect to the Authority's utilities at points designated by COTR and extend utilities to trailers, offices, sheds, etc.

1. Provide COTR approved meters for water, natural gas, electricity, and each other utility used for Project. Supply utilities to Subcontractors' temporary facilities through Contractor's meters. The requirement to provide meters for utilities does not imply that the Contractor will be charged for these utilities, except under provisions outlined in this and other Sections.

2. Report consumption of each utility to COTR each month. Contractor is expected to consume reasonable amounts of each utility. Should Contractor, in COTR's opinion, use

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1


excessive amounts of any utility or waste a utility, Contractor may be required to pay for temporary utilities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit to COTR, for the Authority's review and approval, site plans indicating all temporary facilities, support and security; utility connections and traffic flows. Provide detailed drawings of utility connections and special facilities.

B. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities at both staging area and the Project site. Make all structures weather proof when heated and air-conditioned. Should Contractor, in COTR's opinion fail to keep the heated and cooled structures sealed and weather proof, Contractor may be required to pay for temporary utilities.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction, that include but are not limited to, the following:

1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Police and Fire Department regulations. 4. Environmental protection regulations. 5. ADA Compliance: All temporary facilities shall be ADA compliant.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.

1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.

2. Electrical Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Coordinate with the Authority’s Building Codes/Environmental Department for requirements for certifications, permits, and inspections.

1. Obtain permits from the Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department for temporary construction and temporary utilities.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services, permanent services, and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work:

1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.



3. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. 4. Do not overload facilities. 5. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to

develop or persist on-site.

1.7 CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL PARKING

A. The Contractor's personnel will be allowed to park their personal vehicles in staging areas or in areas designated by COTR. Such designated parking areas are not necessarily fenced or otherwise protected, and temporary fencing for such parking areas is a requirement of this Contract.

B. Display a Vehicle special, non-transferable parking permit available from the Authority on all vehicles parked in such area. Each employee will be required to obtain and pay for their own parking permit and shall be responsible for fines for not displaying permit or for parking in other than designated contractor parking areas. The COTR will provide application forms and explain method of obtaining parking permits at the Pre-Construction Conference.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by COTR. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide new equipment suitable for use intended. If acceptable to COTR, undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used.

B. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Drinking-water fountains or Containerized, tap-dispenser, bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply.

1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.

C. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets that will prevent insertion of 110v or 120v plugs into higher-voltage outlets, and equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters with reset button.

D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use hard-service as defined by NFPA 70, Article 400, where exposed to abrasion and traffic. If single lengths of extension cords will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical extension cords.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Prior to installation of temporary facilities and utilities, submit to the COTR a site layout providing locations and details of the facilities and utilities.

B. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

C. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 CONTRACTOR STAGING AREA - GENERAL

A. Contractor will be allowed to store and stage his materials in a staging area located on Airport property as designated by the COTR for such purposes. Space is limited to area indicated. COTR and Contractor will make a joint site visit to document condition of staging area prior to occupancy. Take photos for the record.

B. Erect and maintain a 6-foot high chain link fence topped with 3-strands of barbed wire around perimeter of staging area. Protect all stored equipment from the weather. The Authority accepts no responsibility for items stored in this area.

C. Upon completion of Construction, remove all temporary staging area facilities and return the areas to their original condition.

D. Park construction equipment in the storage site or storage area identified by the COTR when equipment is not engaged in construction activity.

E. Do not stockpile construction materials, spoils, debris or refuse in any area other than that specifically approved for such purpose by the COTR.

F. Constrain stockpiled material in a manner to prevent its movement by wind, jet blast or propeller wash.

3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide temporary service for each utility required. Comply with requirements of the Authority's Building Codes Manual, the Authority's Construction Safety Manual, and the requirements of all Sections of these specifications.

1. Arrange with COTR for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. For additional information on utility outages see Division 01 Section, "Summary."



2. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is available, provide trucked-in services.

3. Perform work associated with utilities owned by the Authority as approved by the Authority.

4. See additional information in Contract Provisions entitled "Availability and Use of Utility Service."

B. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material.

2. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units, located as approved by COTR. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. Use of the Authority's existing toilet facilities will not be permitted.

3. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at convenient locations for personnel who handle materials that require wash up.

4. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units.

a. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.

C. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period.

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Locate sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

2. Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.



C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Properly recondition and restore those portions of the site occupied by temporary facilities and controls to condition acceptable to COTR, at least equal to condition at time of start of Work, unless otherwise authorized in writing by COTR.

2. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

3. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace roadway paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

4. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."




SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

1. This Section includes substitutions made for "or as approved by the Authority" items.


1. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

2. Divisions 26 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1


performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular form acceptable to COTR, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery

date. i. Item Tag Number or similar ID if identified in the drawings j. Location (room number from the drawings) k. Serial Number (once available)

3. Initial Submittal: Within 90 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from the Contract requirements.

4. COTR's Action: COTR will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 calendar days of receipt of initial product list. COTR's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. COTR's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents.

5. Updated submittal: Submit updated product list every 90 days following initial submittal. The updated list shall be submitted in approved electronic spread sheet format with additional fields as required by COTR.

6. Completed List: Submit 10 hard copies and one electronic copy of completed product list 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for substantial completion. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from the Contract requirements.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit six copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Submit requests in the form and according to procedures required for Contract Modification proposals supplied to Contractor at the pre-



construction meeting or as directed by COTR. Do not submit requests for substitutions as "Requests for Information" (RFIs).

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Authority and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Price. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

m. Failure by Contractor to include the above requirements in the submittal may cause rejection of the submittal in its entirety.

3. COTR's Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 15 calendar days of receipt of a request for substitution. COTR will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or two weeks of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change notice. b. Use product specified if COTR couldn’t make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.



1. COTR’s Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 working days of receipt of a comparable product request. COTR will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or 7 calendar days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittals." b. Use product specified if COTR couldn’t make a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittals." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Comply with product manufacturers written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 7. Protect stored products from damage.



8. Replace products and materials damaged by the elements due to improper storage at no additional cost to the Authority. This damage can be, but not limited to, oxidization, mold, mildew, warping, and rust.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Authority.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Authority.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Division 26 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. The Authority reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. "Or as approved by the Authority": Note that products submitted under an "or as approved by the Authority” provision are considered to be substitutions. Substitutions shall follow the requirements of Paragraph VII-42 of Contract Provisions and provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.



B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: COTR will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 calendar days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at the sole discretion of the Contracting Officer.

B. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 2. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 3. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 4. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 6. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 7. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

C. Contractor's submittal and COTR's review or approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples that relate to a substitute does not by itself constitute a final approval of the requested substitution, nor does it relieve Contractor from fulfilling existing Contract requirements.

D. If a substitution offers a substantial advantage to the Authority, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Authority may be required to bear, the substitution shall be submitted as a Value Engineering Change Proposal.





SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Correction of the Work.


C. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed (materials tests, inspections, acceptance tests, etc.) and record data as required under provisions in Division 01 Sections "Submittals" and "Project Closeout."


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information (RFI) to COTR. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

EXECUTION 017300 - 1

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by COTR.

E. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

F. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

G. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.3 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.


EXECUTION 017300 - 2


SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

1. Division 26 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal, requesting approval from COTR to proceed, describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List utilities that cutting and

patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. Before cutting/core drilling the slab, structural members, concrete walls, etc. X-ray the slab, beam, wall, etc. to determine whether any embedded items such as conduit and reinforcing steel would be cut or disturbed and provide X-rays to COTR. If the cutting/core drilling will cut any conduits, notify the COTR to re-locate the opening or take other action as required. If reinforcing steel is encountered, notify the COTR to either re-locate the opening or evaluate the effect of cutting the reinforcement. Perform

CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 73 29 - 1


this evaluation by a registered professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia. Refer to Division 01 Section “Summary” for utility outage requirements.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. When cutting and patching involves welding or open flame cutting, obtain the approval of the Authority's Fire Marshal for such work prior to its start. Before cutting or drilling a structural element, X-ray the element to determine whether any embedded items such as conduit and reinforcing steel would be cut or disturbed and provide X-rays to COTR. If the cutting/drilling will cut any rebar or conduits, notify the COTR to re-locate the opening or take other action as required. If reinforcing steel is encountered, notify the COTR to either re-locate the opening or evaluate the effect of cutting the reinforcement. Perform this evaluation by a registered professional engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

7. COTR's Approval: Obtain COTR’s approval in writing of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive COTR’s right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Obtain COTR's written approval of the cutting and patching of the following operating elements or safety related items:

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-suppression systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Conveying systems. 7. Electrical wiring systems. 8. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. 9. Security systems including CCTV and duress alarms.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4. Equipment supports. 5. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 7. Insulating systems.



D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in COTR's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1. Processed concrete finishes. 2. Stonework and stone masonry. 3. Preformed metal panels. 4. Roofing. 5. Fire stopping. 6. Window wall system. 7. Fluid-applied flooring.

E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.



B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned; bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Remove conductors back to source of supply.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.



END OF SECTION 01 73 29



SECTION 017700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.


1. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for final requirements of the Warranty Manual.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, Record Product Data, and other Record Documents.

3. Divisions 26 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Definition: "Substantial Completion" is the stage in the progress of the work when COTR determines that all the Work, or a designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and functional according to the Contract Documents so that the Authority can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The only remaining physical work shall be the completion of punch list work prior to Final Acceptance.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, reasons why the Work is not complete, and a schedule for completing punch list work according to Section III of the Contract.

2. Ensure previously outstanding technical submittals and Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved.

3. Advise COTR of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Submit warranties required by Contract Documents, workmanship bonds, maintenance

service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

PROJECT CLOSEOUT 017700 - 1


a. Submit Contractor Warranty Letter, for review and approval, a minimum of 60 days before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. After date of Substantial Completion has been determined revise the Contractor’s Warranty Letter to include that date as start of Warranty period.

5. Obtain and submit releases permitting the Authority unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

6. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents except Record Contract CPM Schedule; also prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information.

7. Prepare and submit proof that specified testing and code inspections have been completed, accepted and certified, including, but not limited to, electrical system testing.

8. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by COTR. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

9. Complete startup testing of systems. 10. Submit test records. 11. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 12. Submit changeover information related to the Authority's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by COTR, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Punch list work must be completed within the duration specified in Section III, "Schedule." Failure to complete the punch list work within the duration specified may result in the Contracting Officer ordering the work to be completed by others at the cost to Contractor.

3. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Acceptance.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Definition: "Final Completion" is the stage in the Contract when the Contracting Officer determines that all Work has been 100 percent completed according to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including administrative obligations. The date of Final Acceptance is the date of execution by the Contracting Officer of a Certificate of Final Acceptance.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."



2. Submit certified copy of COTR's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by COTR. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit a Contractor/COTR joint statement evidencing that all Record Documents, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, warranties, and similar required submittals have been approved.

4. Complete demobilization and removal of temporary facilities from the site including construction equipment and facilities, mockups, and other similar elements. Restore areas to previously existing condition, if applicable.

5. Execute final Contract Modification and submit final Subcontractor Payment Form. 6. Return all AOA badging and all Authority Ids. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 8. Submit Record Contract CPM Schedule. 9. Submit warranty book.

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit four copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize items applying to each space 2. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Contract name and number. b. Date. c. Name of COTR. d. Name of Architect/Engineer. e. Name of Contractor. f. Page number.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit one draft copy of proposed Warranty Manual Specified below within 90 days of Notice to Proceed. COTR will return comments to the Contractor no later than 30 calendar days after receipt.

1. Provide Manufacturer’s Standard Warranties, made out to the Authority, and statement of willingness to provide any applicable Special Warranties required by the Contract Documents 14 calendar days prior to shipping of materials and equipment. Products and



Equipment shall not be considered delivered (for payment purposes) until the approved warranties have been received.

2. Submit written warranties on request of COTR for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: For final cleaning, use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with Authority requirements, local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. General cleaning during construction is included in Division 01 Section "Execution."

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, [elevator equipment,] and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, and other foreign substances.




SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory and formatting. 2. Manuals, General and formatting 3. Emergency Information Manuals and formatting. 4. Operation Information Manuals and formatting for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 5. Maintenance Information Manuals and formatting for the care and maintenance of

products, materials, finishes, systems, and equipment.


1. Division 01 Section “Application for Payment” for values assigned to Operation and Maintenance Manuals

2. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for ensuring the development and continuing update of the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory and Operation and Maintenance Manual.

3. Division 01 Section “Submittals” for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

5. Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents” for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

6. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for products in those Sections.

C. For purposes of payment, O & M and Material and Finishes Manuals are to be valued at 3% of Contract.

D. Payment for materials and equipment will be withheld if complete O & M manual material is not received from the contractor at time of material or equipment delivery. Namely, instruction sheets, operation manuals, installation instructions, and other documents received from the manufacturer at the time of delivery.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

C. Equipment: An instrument or appliance designed for a specific operation.

D. Product: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

E. Location: A defined area such as roof, room, hallway, ceiling, pavement, wall, or floor that has special maintenance requirements that are documented in the Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Manual Format: Submit to COTR within 90 calendar days of Notice to Proceed one draft copy of the proposed Operation and Maintenance Manual Format. Format shall include a table of contents and be as specified in Part 2 of this Section. COTR will return comments regarding the Operation and Maintenance Manual Format and planned contents of the completed manual within 30 calendar days of receipt. Throughout the construction period of the project, Operation and Maintenance data shall be continually inserted in the appropriate sections/parts of the Manual as it is approved.

B. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Submit to COTR within 90 calendar days of Notice to Proceed one draft copy of the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory. Format shall be as specified in Part 2 of this section. COTR will return comments regarding the Directory and planned contents of the completed manual set within 30 calendar days of receipt of submittal. Throughout the construction period of the project, the Directory shall be updated to reflect changes resulting from other submittal approvals.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Initial Submittal: Submit four draft copies of each Manual in the approved format at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete Operations and Maintenance Directory. COTR will return a copy of draft within 30 calendar days of receipt, and mark whether general scope and content of Manuals are acceptable.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Revised Submittals: Submit 4 revised copies of each manual in final form, including one CD containing electronic O & M documentation, at least 45 calendar days before substantial completion or training, whichever occurs first. COTR will return a copy with comments within 15 calendar days after receipt.

E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals Final Submittal: Correct or modify each manual to comply with COTR’s comments. Submit 6 copies of the Document Directory and each corrected manual at least 15 calendar days before substantial completion or training whichever occurs first.



1. Provide four copies of all Operation and Maintenance Data in electronic format on CD-ROM consistent with the organization and format in the “Manuals, General” section. All electronic files shall be in Adobe PDF format and limited to 10 megabytes in size per file.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, the General Contractor shall assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Provide the Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory in separate binder from operation and maintenance information. Binders, dividers and all portions of the Directory shall comply with requirements of “Manuals, General” as applicable. Size of binder for directory shall be appropriate for quantity of contents. Information in O & M Directory shall be in alphabetical order with references to contract Division and Specification Section.

B. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. General Information. 2. List of systems and subsystems. 3. List of equipment. 4. List of Products 5. Table of contents.

C. General Information: Include documents that are pertinent to the project, including, but not limited to, a detailed description of the facility or project, general safety information and a users guide to the project operation and maintenance manuals.

D. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

E. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

F. List of Products: List products alphabetically to include all products not part of a system, subsystem, or component of equipment. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each product.

G. Tables of Contents: Include a complete table of contents for each volume of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

H. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment and products with the same



designation used by the Authority. If no designation is provided for equipment, systems, sub-systems, or equipment assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, “Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems.”

I. Provide a draft of the proposed “Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory” at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Submit draft to COTR for approval in writing.

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize information by Division and then into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information on the title page:

1. Specific subject matter included in manual such as Division number and title, Specification Section number and title, equipment, systems and subsystems.

2. Name and number of the Contract. 3. Date of submittal. 4. Name, address, telephone number, and contact person of Contractor, Subcontractor, and

supplier. 5. Name and address of Architect/Engineer. 6. Cross-reference to related systems in other portions of the Operation and Maintenance

Manuals.

C. Table of Contents: Include a printed, printed by a laser printer, table of contents for each volume, arranged according to the specification format. List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in the Contract Documents.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents by Division then by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring thermoplastic loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on



spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position Dublock mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom of binders. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

a. Provide maximum 3 inch binder thickness. Smaller binders are acceptable as long as 75 percent rated binder capacity is not exceeded.

b. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data for a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

c. Identify each binder on front (If Identification cannot be placed on the front provide as the first page) and spine, with printed title “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL,” Contract number and name, and specific subject matter of contents, such as “Division 23 Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning,” to include Specification Section. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. The use of business labels is prohibited.

2. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, plastic tabbed dividers, for each separate section. Provide laser printed description for each tab section (front and back of tabs), to indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a description of the product or heading for sub tabs using the same laser printed format on the dividers.

3. Provide a typed index describing each product, equipment, and subject addressed in each section on the first page behind each section divider. Include a matching master table of contents for each volume using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between major topics and each different device within a tabbed section.

4. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Provide protective transparent plastic sheet protectors to enclose the Title Page, all Table of Content pages, and photographs.

a. For CD-ROMs, provide transparent plastic three-ring sleeves designed to accommodate CD-ROMs.

5. Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch, 20-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper. Copies of faxed materials may be rejected. Two-sided text shall be provided on 24-lb/sq. ft. white bond paper to eliminate “bleed through” of text with a minimum brightness of 96.

6. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in transparent envelopes and bind envelopes with text. Insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, in the transparent envelopes along with drawings. Drawings shall cross-reference the appropriate manual volume and Specification Section. Drawing holding envelopes are not acceptable.

c. Provide operation and maintenance material on CD-ROM.



E. Transfer Cases: Manuals shall be submitted in durable, multiple thickness fiberboard transfer boxes (legal-size boxes, 15 inches wide by 24 inches long by 10 inches high) with plastic tote handles string and button closures, reinforced poly edge, and a large labeling area that accurately describes the contents. Banker box, Fast Hold Liberty Plus P-12112 or as approved by the Authority.

2.3 EMERGENCY INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Content: Organize information by Division into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of the Authority’s operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

C. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Provide a draft of the proposed Emergency Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.4 OPERATION INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information. Organize manuals into separate and distinct volumes by Division.

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2. Safety instruction and related issues. 3. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 4. Operating standards. 5. Operating procedures. 6. Operating logs. 7. Wiring diagrams, including color-coding and terminal designations. Include all factory

preset or field-set dip switch and jumper settings for all electronic equipment. 8. Control diagrams. 9. Piped system diagrams. 10. Precautions against improper use. 11. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. 12. Material Safety Data Sheets.



B. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. 10. Procedures or operations that may void warranty. 11. Copies of equipment warranties.

C. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

D. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed and color-coding shall be used where required for identification.

E. Provide a draft of the proposed Operation Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MANUAL

A. This Section shall contain information for all products with the exception of Systems and Equipment, which shall be provided as indicated elsewhere in this Section.

B. Content: Organize information into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Provide one section for architectural products, including applied materials and finishes, and a second for products designed for moisture protection and products exposed to the weather. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, schedule of products, location of products and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Source Information: List each product included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer’s name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. 6. Fire/flame-spread test certificates. 7. Material Safety Data Sheets.



E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer’s written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Schedule of Products and Locations: Provide complete information, including reference drawings, in the materials and finishes manual on all products specified in Divisions 02 through 33.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Provide copies of all applicable warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2. Clearly indicate commencement and expiration dates.

I. Provide a draft of the proposed Product Maintenance Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers’ maintenance documentation, preventative maintenance program, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. Organize information into separate and distinct volumes by Division, and further divided into separate volumes by system (for example, HVAC systems and plumbing systems).

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual identified by product name and arranged to match manual’s table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name, model number, and location. 2. Manufacturer’s name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests.



9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 10. Circuit directories of panelboards for electric and electronic systems, including the

following:

a. Electric service. b. Controls.

D. Manufacturers’ Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers’ maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Safety information. 2. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 3. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 4. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 5. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Preventative Maintenance Plan: Provide an annual preventative maintenance plan indicating when maintenance tasks should be performed, such that work is spread evenly as possible throughout the year. Preventative Maintenance should not be misconstrued as reconditioning, or major repairs or replacement of components, but designed to reveal through certain procedures and inspection the need for such actions in time to prevent malfunctions during operation.

F. Preventative Maintenance and Maintenance and Repair Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential preventative maintenance and maintenance and repair procedures:

1. Preventative Maintenance:

a. Provide instructions and location diagrams for the following:

1) Checking general condition of System and Components. 2) Inspecting for accumulation of dust, dirt or any foreign matter, and clean as

needed. 3) Cleaning or replacing all filters and screens and adjust packing for pumps,

valves, etc. 4) Examining indicating lamps, gauges, thermometers, etc., and replace as

required. 5) Checking electrical primary, secondary, terminal blocks and contacts, for

loose connections. 6) Checking Operation of strainers, valves, instruments and control switches,

including their contacts. 7) Checking instrument transformers for proper condition and replace burned

out fuses. 8) Removing dust from all electrical insulators and insulation and inspecting

bus bars and connections for proper condition, loose connection, and overheating or overloads.

9) Examining safety interlocks, automatic shutters, dampers, valves, etc, and their operating mechanisms for proper operation.

10) Checking space heaters, thermostats, and all controls for proper operation



11) Lubricating mechanisms, contacts, and other moving component parts. 12) Specific procedures applicable to specialized equipment and systems.

2. Maintenance and Repairs:

a. Include information and detailed diagnostic testing and inspection instructions, and

procedures that detail essential system and equipment maintenance procedures including but not limited to:

1) Verifying lubrication requirements. 2) Realignment of shaft coupling. 3) Checking motor amperes drawn at full load. 4) Checking motor shaft run-out 5) Performing thermographic scanning of motor starters, motors, pumps and all

mechanical and electrical equipment that requires a connection. 6) Proper cleaning and corrosion control of drip pan and drainage lines. 7) Inspection of internal equipment components for unusual wear of failure. 8) Procedures for maintenance including precautions against improper

maintenance.

b. Include the following information and items that detail essential system and equipment repair procedures:

1) Complete troubleshooting guide. 2) Complete repair instructions including equipment and component removal,

disassembly, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 3) Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions including noise, vibration and

efficiency adjustments. 4) Demonstration and training videotape, if such videotape, CD or DVD is

provided by the manufacturer.

G. Maintenance Service Schedules

1. Provide recommended frequencies, inspections, service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

a. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

b. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers’ forms for recording maintenance.

H. Spare Parts List, Recommended Inventory Requirements and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers’ maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

I. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.



J. Schedule of Products and Locations: Provide complete information, including reference drawings if necessary, in the Equipment and Systems manual on all products specified in Divisions 02 through 33.

K. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of all applicable warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2. Clearly indicate commencement and expiration dates.

L. Provide a draft of the proposed Product Maintenance Information Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.

2.7 WARRANTY INFORMATION MANUAL

A. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Contract Specifications. Warranty documents include Contractor and Major Subcontractors warranty letters, special warranty documents, and manufacturer's warranties.

B. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring thermoplastic loose-leaf binders in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, metal backbone, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position DublLock mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

C. Identify each binder on front (If identification can not be attached to the front include it as the first page in the manual) and spine, with printed title "PROJECT WARRANTIES," Contract number and name. The use of business labels is prohibited.

D. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, tabbed dividers, for each separate section. Provide laser printed description front and back of tabs, to indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a typed index of the contents in each section on the first page behind each section divider. Include a matching master table of contents for the manual using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between each different warranty within a tabbed section.

E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Provide a draft of the proposed Warranty Manual. Submit draft at least 90 calendar days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion to COTR for approval in writing.



3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Compile all required information, as it is approved, into volumes grouped first by specification Division and then by Section in accordance with the information requirements outlined in Part 2 of this specification section and the approved Operation and Maintenance Manual Format.

B. For the first Directory Submittal, prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to the complete manual set. Subsequent submittals of the Directory shall integrate this information by Division.

C. Emergency Information: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by the Authority’s operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

D. Product Maintenance Information: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating manufacturer’s product information, part numbers, description and care and maintenance instructions for each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

E. Operation and Maintenance Information: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance and repair data providing complete information for each system, subsystem and piece of equipment. Include complete operation, preventative maintenance, maintenance and repair instructions, and parts listing with sources indicated; recommended parts inventory listing, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer’s and Installer’s maintenance personnel.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by the Authority’s operating personnel.

F. Manufacturers’ Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers’ standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet with black arrows to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Provide supplementary text if manufacturers’ standard printed data are not provided by the manufacturer. Provide supplementary text where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

G. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers’ printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams and their relation to the structure or facility. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.



1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section “Project Record Documents.”

H. Comply with Division 01 Section “Project Closeout” for a schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.




SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications 3. Record Product Data. 4. Record Schedule. 5. Miscellaneous Record Submittals.

B. Include subparagraph below for projects requiring Contractor to provide Record Drawings in a Computer Aided Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation" for construction schedules as basis for Record Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for ensuring the record drawings and specifications are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the original Contract documents

3. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout " for general closeout procedures 4. Divisions 26 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of

products in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. CADD Record Drawings. Comply with the following:

1. Submit copies of CADD Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of complete, full-sized, CADD Record Drawings. Additional sets of drawings are not to be copied and submitted until after substantial completion to insure all changes are shown on the drawings. The COTR will facilitate review of drawings and indicate whether the CADD Record Drawings are acceptable. The COTR will return review comments indicating any corrections that need to be made to the drawings. The corrected CADD Record Drawings may then be reproduced, and organized into sets, printed, bound, and submitted as final submittal.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1


b. Final Submittal: After construction is complete and changes are recorded, submit six complete, full-sized, printed sets of CADD Record Drawings. Include each sheet, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. Submit two copies of the CADD Record drawings in the approved electronic format. In addition, submit the original set of marked-up record drawings onto which the mark-ups were made.

B. Record Specifications: Submit two copies of Project Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal at the direction of the COTR.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.

D. Record Samples: Submit Record Samples as specified.

E. Record Schedule: Submit three copies of Record Schedule.

F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Submit miscellaneous Record Submittals as specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: During construction, maintain one complete, full sized, set of blue- or black-line prints of the Drawings, applicable shop drawings, and coordination drawings for record purposes. These drawings shall be updated periodically, by the contractor, in CADD to replace the hand mark-ups. The mark-ups shall be preserved for the record. A complete set of Conformed Drawings in CADD will be provided to the Contractor for his use in maintaining the CADD Record Drawings. The CADD files will be provided in Autodesk AutoCAD 2007.

1. Maintenance of Drawings: Maintain the drawings in a clean, dry, legible condition. Keep drawings available during normal working hours for inspection by the COTR.

2. Preparation: Routinely mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the mark-ups on the record set.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later especially underground structures.

b. Record information in an understandable drawing technique. Ensure mark-ups are legible and reproducible.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check markups before enclosing concealed installations.

3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Notice and RFI. k. Changes made following COTR's written orders. l. Details not on the original Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

4. Mark the Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, insert them into drawing set and assign an appropriate sheet number (one that follows the number sequence of the contract drawings). Show cross-references to the new sheets on the Drawings. Update drawing index as needed to reflect new sheets.

5. Mark record drawings with red pen that will reproduce clearly. Use different colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or not indicated on the original Drawings.

7. Note applicable Construction Change Notices, Requests for Information, Technical Support Requests, and similar identification numbers, where applicable. Copies of change documentation shall be inserted into the set for clarification but are not a substitute for mark-ups. If identification numbers for documentation are marked on the drawing when no change resulted, indicate "No Change".

B. Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets: The contractor may add new sheets with supporting sketches and change documentation instead of marking original sheets when neither the original Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation or if the new sheets can show the changes more clearly or additional space is required for markup information.

1. Assign a number to each new sheet and cross-reference on the appropriate related sheets. 2. Consult with COTR for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to

record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. 3. Integrate newly prepared sheets into Record Drawing sets and update drawing index to

reflect new sheets.

C. Format:

1. Identify and date each Record Drawing. Include the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWING” in a prominent location on each sheet.

2. Cover Sheet shall have the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS”, Date, Name of Contractor, and signature.

3. Record CADD Drawings:



a. CADD files provided by COTR and utilized for recording of record mark-ups shall maintain the format of the files provided. Place electronic mark-ups in a newly created layer on each drawing.

b. CADD files created by Contractor: Organize CADD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Record Drawing set. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CADD file.

4. Include the following identification on newly prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING." d. Name of Architect/Engineer (if applicable). e. Name of Contractor. f. Initials of person incorporating the change. g. Drawing identification number. (Ixx/Dxx)

5. Organization of Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Prints: Organize newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Include any contract required coordination drawings and applicable shop drawings. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

D. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RECORD DRAWINGS

1. When there are multiple copies of the same sheet with different mark-ups on each copy, the General Contractor is responsible for consolidating all mark-ups onto a single copy of each individual sheet.

2. The information from all RFI's, Change Notices, Design Clarifications, field adjustments, or any other changes, must be noted on the appropriate drawing. These mark-ups must include enough information to clearly show the actual constructed conditions resulting from the change. The information may be drawn onto the drawing, copied onto the drawing or copied onto a new full size sheet. Every change in construction must have RFI’s, Change Orders or similar supplementary documents; therefore they must be copied in original size and attached to the back of the preceding drawing or at the end of the drawing set, as an appendix, as a full size sheet, same in size as the drawing set. Multiple RFI’s, CN’s and other supplemental documents may be copied in each single sheet.

3. All changes made on the drawings shall reference the appropriate RFI, Change Notices, Design Clarification, or details from the contractor prepared shop drawings. If the mark-up is due to a field adjustment, it shall be indicated as such.

4. Additional Sheets such as shop drawings and sheets showing copies of applicable change documentation must be inserted into the set as necessary. Such sheets shall have a title block.

5. Notes and sketches printed by hand are acceptable but shall be neat, legible, and reproducible. Hand lettering shall be 3/8" high minimum.

6. All shop drawings showing information not on the construction drawings (with the exception of concrete embedded steel reinforcement bending drawings and steel reaction and fabrication drawings) shall be marked up and included in the record drawing set. They shall be the same size (changes in scale noted) as all other drawings, include a title block, and clearly indicate that they are record shop drawings. When the shop drawings more accurately show locations and conditions, they may be marked in lieu of referenced



on the original drawings. This does not relieve the contractor from the shop drawing inclusion requirements in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals that are a separate item

7. Include contract required coordination drawings in the record drawing set.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. Print marked specifications, addenda, and contract modifications on paper any color but white and ensure that black font is clearly legible on the color chosen. Use the same paper color throughout the project. Use black font for these changes.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the brand name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable. 4. Upon completion of mark-up, submit a complete set of record Product Data to COTR for

the Authority's records. 5. Where Record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit

marked-up product data as an insert in the manual.

2.4 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL

A. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet the Authority's personnel at the site to determine which of the samples maintained during the construction period shall be transmitted to the Authority for record purposes. Comply with the COTR's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to the Authority's sample storage space. Dispose of other samples in manner specified for disposal of surplus and waste materials.

2.5 RECORD SCHEDULE



A. Record Schedule Submittal: Immediately prior to date of inspection for Final Acceptance, submit a copy of the As-built Contract CPM Schedule (if applicable) to the COTR.

B. Mark the Contractor’s Construction Schedule to show actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. This Record Schedule shall be in same format as Contractor’s Construction Schedule. This Record Schedule shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to COTR.

1. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Testing and qualification of tradesmen. b. Documented qualification of installation firms. c. Load and performance testing. d. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities. e. Final inspection and correction procedures. f. Final inspections of all trades.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Repair or reproduce torn or dirty sheets. Provide access to Project Record Documents for COTR's reference during normal working hours.




SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing the Authority's personnel, including the following:

1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.


1. Division 01 Section “Application for Payment for cost values assigned to Demonstration and Training requirements.

2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for pre-instruction conferences.

3. Division 01 Section “Operation and Maintenance Data for preparing and submitting demonstration and training agenda and course of study.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit, 90 calendar days prior to request for substantial completion inspection, two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

1. Provide two separate sessions per module. One session per module shall be conducted after normal working hours.

2. Provide a complete set of training manuals for each participant in each module. Allow for 15 participants per module.

3. At completion of training, submit six (12) complete set(s) of training manual(s) for the Authority's use.

B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article provide credentials to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Provide credentials to demonstrate the capabilities and experience of firms required by this Section.

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1


C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test.

E. Demonstration and Training Videotape: Submit two copies at end of each training module.


A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project. Provide 4 references for the Facilitator’s firm that will be used to determine if their training and education has indicated a record of successful learning performance.

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training.

C. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with re-

quirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not lim-ited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,

instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate instruction schedule with the Authority's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting the Authority's operations. Coordinate with COTR.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate content of training agenda with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by COTR.

D. Ensure that approved Operations and Maintenance Manuals are available prior to conducting any training.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training agenda for each system, sub system, and equipment as follows:

1. 15kV Source Transfer Switch 2. Substation Transformers 3. 480V Switchgear and Circuit Breakers 4. Distribution Panels

B. Training Agenda: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each agenda. Submit to COTR 45 calendar days prior to request for substantial completion inspection. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following:

1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:

a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves.

2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:

a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project Record Documents. e. Identification systems. f. Hazards/Material Safety Data Sheets. g. Warranties and bonds. h. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.

3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:

a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures.

4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:



a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures.

5. Adjustments: Include the following:

a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:

a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures.

7. Maintenance: Include the following:

a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools.

8. Repairs: Include the following:

a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.



3.1 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training agenda into a combined training manual.

B. Provide instructional equipment at instruction location.

3.2 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training agenda, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and COTR for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct the Authority's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

1. Furnish an instructor, approved by COTR, to describe basis of each system designed for this project, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.

2. COTR will furnish Contractor with names of training participants.

C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times.

1. Schedule training with COTR with at least 15 calendar days’ advance notice. 2. Submit a daily training agenda (module) to COTR for review and approval for each

system/equipment no later than 15 calendar days prior to the scheduled system equipment startup. After granting the agenda approval, COTR shall provide a listing of dates, times, and places of the training programs for Contractor coordination.

3. Training duration shall not be less than indicated below:

a. 15kV Source Transfer Switch – 8 Hours b. Substation Transformers – 6 Hours c. 480V Switchgear and Circuit Breakers, Distribution Panels – 8 Hours d. Generator and ATSs – 8 Hours

D. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.




SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.

D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Material certificates.

C. Material test reports.

D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1


C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete" 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials"

E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed, epoxy coated.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet, epoxy coated.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, gray

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.



C. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT

A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches long.

2.6 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

C. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.7 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:



Coordinate compressive strength with water-cementitious materials ratio if concrete will be subject to special exposure conditions or sulfate exposure as identified in ACI 318 (ACI 318M).

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding

high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 6. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's

recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.

2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.




A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

2. Steel reinforcement bars splices shall overlap by a minimum of 15” or as required by ACI 318.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by COTR.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.

D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.

3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform



color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an

unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft. long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.

D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.



2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by COTR. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to COTR approval.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.




SECTION 260513 – MEDIUM - VOLTAGE CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes single conductor cables and splices, terminations, and accessories for electrical distribution systems nominally rated 15 KV.

B. All current carrying components, including the cable and the connectors, shall be copper.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data on cables and cable accessories including descriptions and detailed specifications.

B. Shop drawings of splices and terminations.

C. Product certificate signed by manufacturer that its products comply with the specified requirements.

D. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer of cable splicing and terminating products that Installers comply with training requirements specified under "Quality Assurance."

E. Installer certificates signed by Contractor certifying that the Installers of cable splices and terminations meet the experience qualifications specified under "Quality Assurance."

F. Warranty: Submit warranty specified in paragraph 260513.1.6 along with initial submission of product data, shop drawings and Certificates indicated in this section.

G. Product Test Reports: Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance of cable and accessories with referenced standards and this specification.

H. Report of Field Tests: Certified copies of field test records.

I. Maintenance data for cables and accessories for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance manual specified in Division 01."

MEDIUM - VOLTAGE CABLES 260513 - 1



A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer of medium-voltage electrical cable to perform the installation specified in this Section. Engage Installers who are experienced in cable splices and terminations for the specific types of cable and cable accessories specified in this Section. All persons engaged in preparing, splicing or terminating medium voltage cable shall be qualified. All splicers/terminators shall be approved by the COTR or have a certificate from a school which teaches splicing and terminating of solid dielectric cable with the types of splices and terminations specified below. At the option of the COTR the splicer/terminator may be required to prepare a representative sample splice and/or termination prior being permitted to make permanent connections on the project. Refer to Division 01 Section "References" for definition of experienced Installer.

B. Field Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an independent testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.

C. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable IEEE standards including C2 "National Electrical Safety Code."

E. UL Compliance: Cables and components shall be listed and labeled by UL.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver medium-voltage cable on factory reels conforming to NEMA Standard WC 26, "Wire and Cable Packaging."

B. Store cables on reels on elevated platforms or on a hard surface in a clean, dry location. Stand reels vertically so that weight is supported by flanges.

C. Prevent impact damage by: aligning reels flange to flange, using guards across flanges when different reel sizes are stored together, maintain adequate aisles and barricades to prevent equipment from hitting the cable. Protect cable from liquid spills. Advise splicers, installers and handlers of special instructions.

D. Seal the ends of all cable stored outdoors, and reseal both ends when a length is cut from the reel.

E. Cable Inspection: 1) check for shipping damage prior to accepting cable, 2) confirm cable specified was received, and 3) reseal cable ends.

F. Handling: 1) remove nails and staples from reel flanges, 2) calculate and observe recommended bending radii, 3) use swivels and avoid overruns when unreeling.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty to repair or replace medium-voltage cables, splices, and terminations that fail in materials or workmanship within the special project warranty period specified below. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and remedies the Authority may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

1. Special Project Warranty Period: 30 years beginning on the date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Cable:

a. The Kerite Co. b. The Okonite Co. c. Prysmian Cable Corp. d. General Cable e. Rome f. Southwire

2. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories:

a. Electrical Products Division 3M. b. Elastimold c. Raychem Corp. d. RTE Components. e. Adalet - PLM f. Cooper Power Systems

3. Compression Connectors:

a. AMP b. 3M Company c. Burndy d. Thomas & Betts e. Anderson Electrical Connectors

2.2 MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLE

A. General: Cable shall be single-conductor type, 15kV, 133% insulation level. Cable shall conform to UL Standard 1072 Type MV-105, AEIC CS.8, ICEA S-93-639, and ASTM B-8.

B. Cable shall be ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) insulated.



C. Conductor: Uncoated soft, Class B, stranded compressed concentric round copper. Copper shall conform to ASTM B-8. Electrical resistance shall meet requirements of ICEA S-93-639.

D. Conductor Shield: Extruded layer of semi-conducting thermosetting compound. The shield shall be clean stripping from the conductor and bonded to overlying insulation.

E. Insulation: Shall be flexible thermosetting dielectric based on an ethylene propylene elastomer. The insulation shall limit degree of susceptibility to treeing experienced by crystalline materials. Insulation thickness at any cross-section of insulation shall not be less than 90% of the following minimum average thickness: 15 KV - 220 mil.

F. Insulation Shield: Clean stripping extruded semiconducting compound applied over insulation. Electrical and physical requirements conforming to ICEA S-93-639, AEIC CS.8 and UL 1072.

G. Metallic Shielding: Copper shielding tape, 5 mil total thickness, helically applied over the semi - conducting insulation shield, with 12-1/2% overlap.

H. Jacket: Black, sunlight resistant polyvinylchloride with minimum average thickness of 80 mils. Minimum thickness shall not be less than 64 mils.

I. Operating Temperature: 105C continuous, 140C emergency, 250C short circuit.

J. Production Tests: The cable shall be subjected to the following tests:

1. Conductor shall meet resistance requirements of ICEA-S-93-639, 2. Insulation resistance shall be tested in accordance with ICEA S-93-639 to be not less than

50,000 megohms - 1,000 feet, 3. High voltage AC and DC test performed per ICEA S-93-639, 4. Full reel corona test performed per AEIC CS.8 (x-y recording graph shall be furnished

showing test results).

2.3 SPLICING AND TERMINATING PRODUCTS

A. General: Comply with the following standards:

1. IEEE 48: “Standard Test Procedures and Requirements For High Voltage Alternating Current Cable Terminations 2.5 KV Through 765 KV."

2. IEEE 400: “Guide for Field Testing and Evaluation of the Insulation of Shielded Power Cable Systems”.

3. IEEE 404: “Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 V to 500,000 V”.

4. IEEE 592: “Exposed Semi-conducting Shields on High Voltage Cable Joints and Separable Insulated Connectors.”

5. UL 486A-486B: “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.” 6. IEEE 386: “Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems above

600 V”.

B. Types: Compatible with the cable materials. All current carrying components shall be copper.



C. Connectors/Lugs: Compression type, two hole, long barrel, seamless, tin plated copper, listed per UL486A-UL486B.

D. Splicing: Splices are permitted only for extending the existing cabling for temporary connections during construction. No splices are permitted for the final installation of new cabling provided under this project.

E. Splicing and Terminating Kits: As recommended by the manufacturer in writing for the specific sizes, ratings, and configurations of cable conductor, splices, and terminations specified. Kits shall contain all components required for a complete splice or termination including detailed instructions and shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Completed splices and terminations shall provide insulation equivalent to the insulation class of the cable it connects.

F. Splices shall be made with standard splicing kits and shall be of the following type:

1. In-line splice kit for single conductor, extruded dielectric, shielded 15kV cable. Splice shall be of uniform cross-section construction with outer heat shrink jacket.

2. Heat shrinkable type with heat shrinkable inner stress control and outer non-tracking tubes, multiple molded non-tracking skirt modules, and compression type coupling.

G. Conductor Terminations, General: Comply with Class 1, IEEE Standard 48. Insulation class shall be equivalent to that of the cable upon which they are installed. Terminations for shielded cables shall include a shield grounding strap. Include an effective moisture seal for the end of the insulation whether or not this item is included in termination kits. Seal shall be heat shrink rubber sleeve for separable connector terminations and heat shrink plastic sleeve for bolted connections, as recommended by the kit manufacturer. Termination kits shall be performance tested for compliance with IEEE Standard 48 and shall be of the following types:

1. All current carrying components of the separable connector shall be copper. 2. Class 1 Termination for Shielded Cable: Heat shrinkable type with heat shrinkable inner

stress control and outer non-tracking tubes, multiple molded non-tracking skirt modules, and compression type connector.

3. Separable insulated elbow connectors: Modular system, complying with IEEE Standard 386. System shall consist of disconnectable, 600A, 3 phase rated, single pole, cable terminators and matching stationary, plug-in, dead front terminals. System components shall be designed for the system voltage and for sealing against moisture. Elbows shall include voltage test points on molded connector body. Voltage rating of separable elbow connectors shall be 15kV.

2.4 ARC-PROOFING MATERIALS

A. Arc-proofing tape shall consist of a UL-listed fire proofing tape. Tape shall be flexible, conformable, intumescent to 0.3-inches thick, and compatible with the cable jacket on which used. Tape shall be self-extinguishing and shall not support combustion.

B. Glass cloth tape shall be pressure-sensitive adhesive type, 1/2-inch wide.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine raceways, cable trays, pull boxes, manholes, junction boxes, and other cable installation locations for cleanliness of raceways, minimum bending radii of cables, and conditions affecting performance of cable. Pull a mandrel of not less than 80% of the diameter of the inside of the duct and a bristle brush through raceways to check for suitable conditions. Do not proceed with cable installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Install cable accessory items in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated.

B. Notification: Notify COTR 24 hours prior to commencement of all cable pulls.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one cable is indicated in same raceway. Use UL listed and manufacturer approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Use dynamometer, capstan and two way communication to ensure this. Pulling shall not exceed 25 feet per minute. Never pull on middle of cable. Seal cable ends while pulling.

B. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to cable.

C. Do not install cable if ambient temperature is below 32oF. During cold weather installation, cable shall be pulled more slowly and trained in place the same day it is removed from storage. Do not impact, drop, kick or bend cable sharply in low temperatures.

D. Feed cable into conduit using a guide tube or a conveyor sheave assembly. Use single sheaves for guiding cable only. Do not exceed bend radii while pulling over a sheave. Set up cable reels so that cable comes off reel with its natural curvature. Do no reverse bend cable.

E. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Bending Radii - Maintain 12X overall diameter or greater.

G. Train cable to avoid dragging on edge of raceway.

H. If using a basket grip, secure it in place with steel stripping and cut well behind the area it covers once the cable is in place.



I. In manholes, handholes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to prevent sag. However, redundant circuits shall be racked on opposite sides of the manhole or vault.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS

A. Install splices for temporary connection using a standard kit. Conform to kit manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install terminations at ends of conductors using standard kits. Conform to manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with classes of terminations indicated.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A-486B.

D. When splicing and terminating medium voltage cable:

1. Keep cable and work area clean and dry. 2. Do not cut insulation. 3. Completely remove semi-conducting insulation shield, but do not lift it at cut-off point. 4. Keep non-shielded conductors away from ground and other phase conductors. 5. Ensure cable bends are smooth. 6. Use skirted terminators outdoors or in contaminated areas. 7. Use minimum amount of cleaning solvent.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CABLE ACCESSORIES

A. Arc-Proofing: Arc-proof medium-voltage cables individually in manholes and handholes. Apply as recommended by the manufacturer of the arc-proofing tape and the following:

1. Clean cable sheath. 2. Apply arc-proofing tape in one half-lapped layer with the coated side toward the cable. 3. Secure the arc-proofing tape with adhesive glass cloth tape per manufacturer’s instructions.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors. Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated connector fittings, and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Use minimum of No. 4 AWG copper conductor and compression lugs.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify cable in accordance with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems"




4.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Comply with applicable standards of The InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) including Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems."

B. Preparation: Perform the following preparations in advance of independent tests:

1. Test cables' insulation resistance. 2. Test circuits' continuity. 3. Furnish a set of Contract Documents and manufacturer's recommendations to test

organization. 4. Make power available at test locations.

C. Schedule tests and notify COTR at least one week in advance of schedule for test commencement.

D. Test procedure:

1. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an independent electrical testing organization in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" to perform tests on medium-voltage cable. The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices, installations, and systems. The testing firm shall have at least five years of experience in the testing of electrical equipment of the type, rating, and voltage used on this Project. The testing firm shall be a current full-member company of the International Electrical Testing Association (http://www.neta.org/). This independent testing firm shall perform duties as required under the terms of this Contract.

2. Test Objectives: To assure cable installation is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is installed in accordance with Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing.

3. Procedures: Comply with the INETA standard and IEEE 400. Upon satisfactory completion of tests, attach a label to tested components.

E. Reports: The testing organization shall maintain a written record of observations and tests, report defective materials and workmanship, and retest corrected defective items. Testing organization shall submit written reports to the COTR and Contractor.





SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for single-conductor and multiconductor cables, cable splices, and terminations for electrical distribution systems with 2001 to 35,000 V.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Field quality-control reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. 2. Alpha Wire. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Encore Wire Corporation. 5. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 6. Southwire Incorporated.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456817811&mf=04&src=wd







B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-THWN-2.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

C. Provide compression type connectors for all conductors larger than #6 copper.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8AWG and larger.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.











WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

C. For conductors #6 and larger, splices, terminations, and taps shall be made utilizing compression type connectors. Compression type connectors shall be copper.

D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.



PART 4 – CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

C. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications:

1. Underground distribution grounding.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following:

1. Ground rods. 2. Ground rings.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

a. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at test wells based on NETA MTS and NFPA 70B.

1) Tests shall determine if ground-resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if values do not.

2) Include recommended testing intervals.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 4/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Provide and route along with phase conductors.

B. Grounding Electrode System Connections: Use exothermic welded connections or listed compression type connectors.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

D. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each ground rod and to medium switchgear, extending around the perimeter of switchgear concrete pad.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 4/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches (600 mm) from switchgear pad.



A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



B. Tests and Inspections:

3. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

4. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 10 ohms.

H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. 2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.


1. Section 260543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems" for exterior ductbanks and underground utility construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RMC: Rigid Metal Conduit

B. EMT: Electrical Metallic Tubing


A. Product Data: For hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports. 2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 6. Republic Conduit. 7. Robroy Industries. 8. Southwire Company. 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 10. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 11. Wheatland Tube Company; a division of John Maneely Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. RMC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

F. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

G. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Compression.

H. Joint Compound for RMC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


1. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. 2. EGS/Appleton Electric.


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1747&mf=04&src=wd












http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1754&mf=04&src=wd




3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. 4. Hoffman; a Pentair company. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Killark Division. 6. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of EGS Electrical Group. 8. RACO; a Hubbell Company. 9. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

E. Gangable boxes are prohibited.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: RMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: RMC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. All medium voltage conduit (13.2kV): RMC 2. Exposed less than 8’ above finished floor level: RMC 3. Exposed more than 8’ above finished floor level: EMT 4. Exposed conduit drop from overhead into electrical equipment where top of the

equipment is more than 6’ above finished floor: EMT 5. Connection to vibrating equipment: FMC 6. Concealed in walls or above ceiling: EMT 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.

3. EMT: Use compression type fittings only











3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in aircraft hangars and related spaces.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports.

E. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction.

F. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached.

G. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

I. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.

J. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

K. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

L. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in use.

M. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 12 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit.

N. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits.



3.3 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.



A. General: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. Inspections: Perform the following inspections: 1. Verify that all raceways and boxes are properly applied in accordance with this

specification section 2. Verify the all raceways and boxes are properly installed in accordance with this

specification section. 3. Verify that firestopping has been properly applied.

C. Reports: Maintain a written record of observations, report defective materials and workmanship, and reinspect corrected defective items. Submit written reports to the COTR.




SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conduit, ducts, and duct accessories for concrete-encased duct banks. 2. Handholes and boxes.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.


A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Duct-bank materials, including separators and miscellaneous components. 2. Ducts and conduits and their accessories, including end bells, bends, fittings, and solvent

cement. 3. Accessories for manholes. 4. Warning tape.

B. Shop Drawings for Factory-Fabricated Handholes and Boxes Other Than Precast Concrete: Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations, and fabrication and installation details, including the following:

1. Duct entry provisions, including locations and duct sizes. 2. Cover design.


A. Duct-Bank Coordination Drawings: Show duct profiles and coordination with other utilities and underground structures.

1. Include plans and sections, drawn to scale, and show bends and locations of expansion fittings.

UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 - 1


B. Product Certificates: For concrete and steel used in precast concrete handholes, as required by ASTM C 858.

C. Source quality-control test reports.

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Comply with ANSI C2.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Deliver ducts to Project site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming.

B. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: See section 011000 “Summary” for utility outage requirements.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading, and surface features as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into manholes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and as approved by COTR.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT

A. Listing and Labeling: Conduit and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Rigid Metal Conduit: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.



C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, UL 651, with matching fittings by same manufacturer as the conduit, complying with NEMA TC 3 and UL 514B.

2.2 NONMETALLIC DUCTS AND DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ARNCO Corp. 2. Beck Manufacturing. 3. Cantex, Inc. 4. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 5. Condux International, Inc. 6. ElecSys, Inc. 7. Electri-Flex Company. 8. IPEX Inc. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT; a division of Cable Design Technologies. 11. Spiraduct/AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

B. Duct Accessories:

1. Duct Separators: Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacings indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2. Warning Tape: Underground-line warning tape specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.3 UTILITY STRUCTURE ACCESSORIES

A. Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete Is Cast: Zinc-plated, carbon-steel-wedge type with stainless-steel expander clip with 1/2-inch (13-mm) bolt, 5300-lbf (24-kN) rated pullout strength, and minimum 6800-lbf (30-kN) rated shear strength.

B. Duct-Sealing Compound: Nonhardening, safe for contact with human skin, not deleterious to cable insulation, and workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F (2 deg C). Capable of withstanding temperature of 300 deg F (150 deg C) without slump and adhering to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Cables: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, in concrete-encased duct bank, unless otherwise indicated.














3.2 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes and Boxes for 600 V and Less, Including Grounding: 1. Units in Driveway, Parking Lot, and Off-Roadway Locations, Subject to Occasional,

Nondeliberate Loading by Heavy Vehicles: Precast concrete, AASHTO HB 17, H-20 or Polymer concrete, SCTE 77, Tier 15 structural load rating.

3.3 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and Backfill: Comply with Section 310100 "Earthwork," but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

B. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

C. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching.

D. Cut and patch existing pavement in the path of underground ducts and utility structures according to Sections 310100, 321216, 321313 and 321373.

3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Curves and Bends: Use 5-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches (1220 mm), both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

C. Duct Entrances to Manholes: Core drill existing manholes to accommodate conduit entry into manhole. 1. Grout conduit into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

D. Sealing: Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.

E. Pulling Cord: Install 100-lbf- (445-N-) test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.

F. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.

1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet (6 m) of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately 6 inches (150 mm) between tiers. Tie entire assembly together.

2. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation.



a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage.

b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch (19-mm) reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches (450 mm) into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.

3. Pouring Concrete: Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 033000 “Cast-in-Place Concrete”. Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.

4. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties as shown on the drawings

5. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. Provide vapor barrier at sides and bottoms of all ductbanks.

6. Minimum Space between Ducts: as shown on drawings 7. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches (600 mm) below finished grade. 8. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches (300 mm) above all

concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches (75 mm) of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch (300-mm) increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches (450 mm). Space additional tapes 12 inches (300 mm) apart, horizontally.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE MANHOLES, HANDHOLES, AND BOXES

A. Precast Concrete Handhole Installation:

1. Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting

ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel,

graded from 1-inch (25-mm) sieve to No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

B. Elevations:

1. Install handholes with bottom below the frost line. 2. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. 3. Cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts and utility structures according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



3.7 CLEANING

A. Pull leather-washer-type duct cleaner, with graduated washer sizes, through full length of ducts. Follow with rubber duct swab for final cleaning and to assist in spreading lubricant throughout ducts.

B. Clean internal surfaces of manholes, including sump. Remove foreign material.

3.8 DUCT TESTING

A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts.

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.



A. Perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements on completion of installation of underground ducts.

2. Pull aluminum or wood test mandrel through duct to prove joint integrity and test for out-of-round duct. Provide mandrel equal to 80 percent fill of duct. If obstructions are indicated, remove obstructions and retest.

B. Correct deficiencies and retest as specified above to demonstrate compliance.




SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies electrical identification materials and includes requirements for electrical identification including but not limited to the following:

1. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. 2. Operational instruction signs. 3. Warning and caution signs. 4. Equipment labels and signs.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific electrical identification associated with specific items.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for each type of product specified.

B. Schedule of all tags, markers, nameplates, signs, etc.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. Comply with manufacturers instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553- 1


1. American Engraving Co. 2. Seton Name Plate Co. 3. Standard Signs, Inc. 4. W.H. Brady, Co. 5. Almetek Industries 6. Tech Products, Inc. 7. William Frick & Company 8. Thomas & Betts

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8-inch thick for larger sizes. Drill holes for mechanical fasteners when mounted indoors.

B. Baked Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location.

C. Exterior Metal Backed Butyrate Warning and Caution Signs: Weather resistant, nonfading, preprinted cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 20-gage galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to the location. Provide 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.

D. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self tapping stainless steel screws or number 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

E. Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking nylon cable ties, 0.18-inch minimum width, 50-lb minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 50 deg F to 350 deg F.

F. Cable Markers: Provide "E-Z Tag" as manufactured by Almetek Industries Inc., or "Everlast" tags as manufactured by Tech Products Inc. Tags shall consist of 1.0 inch high numerals or letters placed in a tag holder. Tags and holder shall be manufactured from U.V. stabilized non-conductive, non-corrosive polyethylene or equal. Tag holder shall be black and numerals and letters shall be black on yellow background. Numerals and letters shall be oriented either horizontally or vertically depending on orientation of cable.

G. Pressure Sensitive Markers for Outdoor Equipment: Provide markers as manufactured by Almetek Industries or William Frick & Company or equal. Provide minimum 1.0 inch high numerals or letters. On medium voltage equipment provide markers that are black on reflective yellow background. Markers shall be resistant to U.V. light.



3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code.

B. Install identification products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC.

C. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.

D. Medium Voltage Cable Identification: In manholes indicate voltage, feeder number and phase letter on each cable. Inside equipment indicate phase letter on each cable. Install markers on cables after arc proofing is applied. Attach with cable ties.

E. Low Voltage Conductor Color-Coding: Provide color coding as follows:

208/120 Volts Phase 480/277 Volts Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray Green Ground Green

If the existing building wiring color coding differs with this color coding standard, use color coding consistent with that of the existing building wiring.

F. Use low voltage conductors with color factory-applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows:

1. The following color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory color-coded wire for sizes No. 4 AWG and Larger.

a. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding.

G. Provide warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:

1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where required for safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems. Install engraved plastic laminated instruction signs where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. Attach signs to outdoor equipment using two-part epoxy cement.



2. Emergency Operating Signs: Where required provide engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions.

H. Provide equipment/system, circuit/device identification as follows:

1. Provide engraved plastic laminate identification markers on electrical equipment. For 240V systems and below provide white lettering on black background. For 480/277V systems, use black lettering on yellow background. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Apply markers on all of the following:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. c. Electrical substations. d. Power transfer equipment. e. Transformers. f. Disconnect switches. g. Circuit breakers

I. Circuit Schedules: For panelboards provide typed circuit schedules with identification of items controlled by each breaker.

J. Install labels, tags and markers at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

K. Pad Mounted Equipment: Place 1.0-inch high, black on reflective yellow marker indicating voltage and circuit number in upper left corner of exterior of door securing feeder compartment. Where two feeders enter a compartment, place marker on exterior of door along top edge opposite respective feeder.

L. Pad Mounted Transformers: Using 3.0-inch high, black on reflective yellow pressure sensitive markers, identify transformer size (i.e., 45KVA). Centrally locate marker on exterior of high voltage compartment door. Identify feeders per paragraph "K" and "D" above.

M. Raceway: Identify with pressure sensitive markers purpose of circuit ( i.e., lighting, power, alarm, signal, etc.). Place marker on junction boxes and along raceway on 150-foot centers. Markers shall be black on white background. Identify conduits containing medium-voltage cables with warning sign indicating “DANGER – 15,000 VOLTS”.

N. Pad Mounted Switches: Identify switch operating handles sequentially beginning with number 1. Use markers 1.0-inch high, pressure sensitive, black on reflective yellow background. Place marker adjacent to operating handle on exterior of enclosure.






B. Inspections: Perform the following inspections:

1. Verify that all components are properly labeled 2. Verify the all warning signs are properly applied. 3. Verify that operating instructions and emergency operating instructions are clear and concise.


END OF SECTION 26 05 53



SECTION 260573 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND ARC FLASH STUDY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current, overcurrent protective device coordination and arc flash studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device coordination study. Arc flash labels shall be placed on equipment based on the arc flash study.

B. The scope of the studies shall apply to the new facilities provided under this contract. The study shall be performed beginning at the 15kv feeder in the existing manhole through the new 480V switchgear and distribution panels.


A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for system protective devices has been completed. Submittals shall be in both hard copy and digital form.

1. The short circuit analysis, protective device coordination study and arc flash study shall

be submitted to the Engineer prior to release of electrical distribution equipment for manufacture. The Contractor shall include sample arc flash labels with the arc flash study for Engineer’s approval. Approval from the Engineer may be obtained for a preliminary submittal of electrical distribution equipment with sufficient detail to ensure that device selection and protection scheme will be adequate. The detailed shop drawings of the equipment will not be reviewed until preliminary analysis and study is approved by Engineer. No exceptions will be allowed.

2. The arc flash study shall include detailed arc flash analysis and recommendations for reducing arc flash hazard risk categories (HRC) to two (2) and below. Provide arc flash warning labels at least 30 days prior to energizing the electrical equipment.

3. Provide report on equipment design deficiencies, if any, with proposed corrective modifications.

4. Final settings of protective devices shall be approved by the Engineer prior to project acceptance and shall be based on the results of the power system analysis.

5. Contractor shall provide complete settings for all relays included in study. For any microprocessor relays used contactor shall provide electronic files for relay settings as

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION AND ARC FLASH STUDY 260573- 1


per manufacturer requirements and documentation. Electronic files shall include settings for all parameters, for enabled and disabled functions as per coordination study and shall be submitted with the studies for Engineer’s approval.

6. Submittals shall indicate proposed changes to (i) the protection scheme, protective device setting, (ii) existing / new equipment / apparatus to reduce HRC to two (2) and below, and (iii) existing / new equipment / apparatus to comply with harmonic level limits required by the IEEE Standard 519.

7. The results of the studies shall be summarized in a final report, signed by the professional electrical engineer, registered in the State of Virginia, responsible for the studies.

8. The final report shall include the following:

a. Descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope and assumptions of the study. b. Project Single – line diagram. c. Single-line diagram with identification of protective devices and short circuit

currents, ground fault magnitudes, arc flash energy, and hazard risk category at each bus.

d. Tabulations of the relays and other protective device, such as fuses, circuit breaker trip settings versus calculated short circuit duties, and commentary regarding the same.

e. Protective device time-current coordination curves, fuse selection, and commentary regarding the same.

f. Equipment evaluation: Interrupting/withstand ratings of electrical equipment. g. Microprocessor relays: Settings of all parameters, enabled and disabled functions. h. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for

interpretation of computer printout. i. Ground fault current calculations. j. Arc Flash Evaluations summary spreadsheet. k. Arc Flash hazard warning printed in color on adhesive backed labels provided after

final approval of study. l. Specific recommendations including analysis for adequacy of short circuit

protective devices, protective co-ordination, and arc flash HRC. m. Electronic files of input and output data report, protective device ratings and

settings, TCC curves, and arc flash study.


A. Qualification Data: For arc flash study specialist.

B. Product Certificates:

1. For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

2. For arc flash study computer software programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 1584-2004/2004 and NFPA 70E.



A. Studies shall use computer programs that are specified in this section. Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Arc Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices for the past five years.

1. Professional engineer, licensed in Virginia, shall be responsible for the study. All

elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of engineer.

C. Reference: Comply with requirements of applicable standards including but not limited to the most recent addition of the following:

1. ANSI/IEEE Std. 242, IEEE: Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of

Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. 2. ANSI C37.010, Application Guide for AC High Voltage Current Circuit Breakers on a

Symmetrical Basis. 3. IEEE 141, Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution in Industrial Plants. 4. IEEE 399, Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System

Analysis. 5. NETA Std. ATS, Latest Edition: Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical

Power and Distribution Equipment and Systems. 6. NFPA 70, National Electric Code. 7. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 8. IEEE 1584-2004/2004a, IEEE Guide for performing arc flash hazard calculations. 9. ANSI/IEEE Standard 519-1992 – Harmonic Limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Fault current, coordination and arc flash studies shall be performed using the latest version of one of the following software programs:

1. ESA Inc. 2. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.





3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.

1. Proceed with coordination and arc flash studies only after relevant equipment

submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other electrical Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance. 3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:

a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types. b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios. c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, and X/R ratios. d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance. e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,

insulation, and length. f. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.

4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting

and stopping. b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush

current, and overload capability. c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of

start, and thermal-damage curve. d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.



h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 FAULT CURRENT STUDY

A. Calculate short-circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties on the basis of an assumed bolted 3-phase short circuit at each bus. The short circuit tabulations shall include X/R ratios, asymmetry factors, kVA and symmetrical fault-current. Where ground fault protection is specified, provide a ground fault current study for the same system areas. Include in tabulation form, fault impedance, X/R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor contribution, short circuit kVA, and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

B. Perform short circuit of entire electrical distribution system to calculate available three-phase, phase to phase, phase to ground and ground fault currents at each location within the electrical system. Provide calculations for symmetrical half-cycle three-phase, phase to phase and phase to ground fault currents, momentary three-phase fault currents, and asymmetrical 3-cycle / 5- cycle / 8-cycle fault currents.

C. Study shall include simulation of both the normal condition and the abnormal operating condition that yields the greatest calculated fault currents.

D. Provide equipment evaluation report confirming that manufacturer’s equipment withstand ratings are adequate for the worst case calculated fault currents.

E. Provide equipment evaluation report confirming that manufacturer’s specific protective device AIC ratings exceed the worst case calculated fault currents. Indicate any equipment that has series rated current limiting fuses.

3.4 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Provide separate plots for utility and generator operation as applicable. Show maximum and minimum fault values in each case. Multiple power sources shown in one plot is not acceptable.

B. The coordination plots shall graphically indicate the coordination proposed for the several systems centered on full scale log forms. The coordination plots shall include complete titles, representative one-line diagrams and legends, associated upstream power system relays, fuse or system characteristics, significant motor starting characteristics, significant generator characteristics, complete parameters for power, and substation transformers, complete operating bands for low voltage circuit breaker trip devices, fuses, and the associated system load protective devices. The coordination plots shall define the types of protective devices selected, together with the proposed coil taps, time-dial settings and pick-up settings required. The short-time region shall indicate the relay instantaneous elements, the magnetizing inrush,



and ANSI transformer damage curves, the low voltage circuit breaker and instantaneous trip devices, fuse manufacturing tolerance bands, and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault-currents.

C. Provide coordination plots which include the ground fault protective device settings along with the other overcurrent settings. Plots which include ground fault protective devices shall also include a typical downstream 20A circuit breaker, and a sampling of other downstream devices, to show where coordination exists or does not exist between devices. Ground fault settings shall attempt to coordinate with downstream devices to the maximum extent practicable.

D. No more than six devices shall be shown on one coordination plot. Of these six curves, two (the largest upstream device and the smallest downstream device) shall repeat curves shown on other coordination plots in order to provide cross reference. Give each unique protective device curve in the study a study-unique number or letter identifier to permit cross reference between plots. Do not use identifier letters or numbers more than once.

E. Include a detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics. Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pickup, instantaneous, and time delay settings. Include C.T. ratio, burden and all other calculations required for the determination of settings.

F. Provide each study with the following items as a minimum:

1. Coordination plots graphically indicating the coordination proposed for the several systems. Provide plots centered on full scale log-log forms.

2. Coordination plots with:

a. Complete titles. b. Representative one-line diagrams and legends. c. Associated power company’s relay or system characteristics, motor controller fuses

and relays. d. Significant motor starting characteristics. e. Complete parameters for power, network and substation transformers. f. Complete operating bands for low voltage circuit breaker trip devices, fuses, if

applicable, and the associated system load protective devices.

3. Coordination plots which define the types of protective devices selected, together with the proposed coil taps, time dial settings and pickup settings required.

4. In the long time region of the coordination plots, indicate:

a. A complete tap scale for each medium voltage relay. b. Full load current transformer parameters. c. Designate the pickups required for the low voltage circuit breakers.

5. In the short time region, indicate:

a. The medium voltage relay instantaneous elements. b. The magnetizing inrush. c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) withstand transformer parameters.



d. The low voltage circuit breaker, short time and instantaneous trip devices. e. Fuse manufacturing tolerance bands, including the low voltage network protector

fuses, when applicable. f. Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

G. Coordinate each item of equipment as follows: 1. Select each primary protective device required for a delta-to-wye-connected

transformer so that the characteristics or operating band is within the transformer parameters which includes a parameter equivalent to 58% of the ANSI withstand point to afford protection for secondary line-to-ground faults.

2. Provide the transformer damage curve for each transformer when the selected protective device is not within the associated parameters.

3. Separate low voltage power circuit breakers from each other and the associated primary protective device by a 16% current margin for coordination and protection in the event of secondary line-to-line faults.

4. Separate medium voltage relays by a 0.4 second time margin when the maximum three-phase fault flows, to assure proper selectivity.

5. Suitably terminate the protective device characteristics or operating band to reflect the actual symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents sensed by the device.

6. Source combinations, large motors, or generators.

H. Obtain pertinent information for the upstream and downstream protective devices including: 1. Characteristics and settings. 2. Feeder sizes, types, and lengths.

3.5 GROUND FAULT COORDINATION

A. Plots shall include the ground fault protective device settings along with the other overcurrent settings. Plots which include ground fault protective devices shall also include analysis of downstream circuit breakers to show where coordination exists or does not exist between devices. Ground fault settings shall attempt to coordinate with downstream devices to the maximum extent practicable

3.6 ARC FLASH ANALYSIS

A. Provide arc flash analysis results in a tabular format depicting the following for each bus: bus name, protective device name, bus voltage, calculated 3-phase bolted fault current, calculated arc-fault current, trip delay, breaker opening time, equipment type, grounding type, arc flash boundary, working distance, incident energy, and NFPA 70E hazard/risk category.

B. Arc flash analysis results shall include all motor contributions and generator contributions. Arc flash calculations shall include evaluation of all equipment that can be operated or maintained while energized including disconnect switches connected to motors.



C. Arc flash analysis shall provide recommendations, including cost estimates, for achieving arc flash hazard risk category to 2 and below.

D. Arc flash analysis shall include all the electrical equipment supplied by transformers rated 125kVA and above.

3.7 WARNING LABELS

A. Provide warning labels on the equipment including disconnect switches for arc flash and shock hazard in accordance with the NFPA 70E for safe work practices and for personal protection. The labeling shall include the following at minimum:

DANGER ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD Appropriate PPE Required for arc flash and shock hazards

NFPA Hazard/Risk Category

Flash Hazard Boundary ________________ inch

Incident Energy _______________cal/cm2 at ____________ inch working distance

PPE Required

Shock Hazard Voltage ________________volts

Limited Approach Boundary ____________________inches

Restricted Approach Boundary ___________________inches

Prohibited Approach Boundary ___________________inches

B. Provide warning labels on the electrical equipment including disconnect switches, panelboards, controllers, terminal cabinets, and other facilities fed from transformers rated 112.5kVA and below in accordance with the NFPA 70E.

C. Submit sample label design template of each equipment type for Engineer’s approval. Arc flash labels shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, and all applicable standards of ANSI Z535. Arc flash labels shall be prepared and affixed onto corresponding electrical equipment upon completion of approved arc flash analysis. Labels shall consist of a die-cut material that is resistant to facing, moisture, heat, rain, or freezing temperatures.






B. Inspections: Perform the following inspections:

1. Verify that all recommended settings from the study have been applied or addressed. 2. Verify the all warning labels are properly applied. 3. Verify that operating instructions and emergency operating instructions are clear and

concise.





SECTION 261116 - SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes indoor secondary unit substations, consisting of the following:

1. Primary incoming section. 2. Transformer. 3. Secondary distribution section.


1. Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables" for requirements of terminating cables in incoming section of substation.

2. Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination and Arc Flash Study" for short-circuit rating of devices and for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3. Section 261300 "Medium-Voltage Switchgear" for source transfer switch and primary fuses.

4. Section 262300 “Low Voltage Switchgear” for requirements for low voltage switchgear.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Dimensioned plans and elevations showing major components and features. 3. One-line diagram. 4. List of materials. 5. Nameplate legends. 6. Size and number of bus bars and current rating for each bus, including mains and

branches of phase, neutral, and ground buses.

SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS 261116 - 1


7. Short-time and short-circuit current ratings of secondary unit substations and components.

8. Ratings of individual protective devices.

C. Time-Current Characteristic Curves: For overcurrent protective devices.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Dimensioned concrete base, outline of secondary unit substation, and conduit entries. 2. Location of existing raceways including structural supports. 3. Location of lighting fixtures, existing mechanical and plumbing piping, and ducts. 4. Provide drawing showing the location of new substation to be installed in the space

available alongside the existing substation.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Product Certificates: For secondary unit substations, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For secondary unit substations.

E. Factory test reports.

F. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For secondary unit substations and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Spare fuses: Six of each type and rating of fuse and fusible device used. Include spares for the following: a. Potential transformer fuses. b. Control power fuses.

2. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed. 3. Touchup Paint: Three half-pint containers of paint matching enclosure's exterior finish. 4. One set of spare mounting gaskets for bushings, handholes, and the gasket between relief

cover and flange of pressure relief device. 5. One set of spare surge arresters.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain secondary unit substation through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of secondary unit substations and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 016000 "Product Requirements."

D. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with IEEE C2.

F. Comply with IEEE C37.121.

G. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Deliver in shipping splits in sizes that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Coordinate delivery of secondary unit substations to allow movement into designated space.

C. Store secondary unit substation components protected from weather and so condensation will not form on or in units. Provide temporary heating according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Handle secondary unit substation components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use factory-installed lifting provisions.


A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Interruption of Existing electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify COTR no fewer than three weeks in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. See Section 011000 “Summary” for Outage requirements.



2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without COTR’s written permission.

C. Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions, except for the following: 1. Unusual transportation or storage conditions. 2. Unusual space limitations.

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Limited space is available for the new equipment during the interim period during which the existing equipment must remain functional. Equipment of some manufacturers may be larger than can be accommodated in the space available. Alternate radiator configuration on the transformer may be required. Provide an informational submittal drawing showing the new substation installed in the space available alongside the existing substation, allowing adequate space for work required.

B. Coordinate layout and installation of secondary unit substations with other construction that penetrates floors and ceilings, or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression-system components.

C. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ABB Control, Inc. 2. Cooper Industries, Inc.; Cooper Power Systems Division. 3. Cutler-Hammer. 4. GE Electrical Distribution & Control. 5. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 6. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Indoor Unit Arrangement: Single assembly.

B. Enclosure Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

2.3 INCOMING SECTION

A. Primary Incoming Section: Terminal assembly with adequate space for incoming-cable terminations and surge arresters.









B. Bus: All bus shall be copper.

2.4 LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMER SECTION

A. Description: IEEE C57.12.00 and UL 1062, liquid-filled, 2-winding, secondary unit substation transformer.

B. Insulating Liquid: Less flammable, edible-seed-oil based, and UL listed as complying with NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be biodegradable and nontoxic.

C. Insulation Temperature Rise: 65/55 deg C, based on an average ambient temperature of 30 deg C over 24 hours with a maximum ambient temperature of 40 deg C. Insulation system shall be rated to continuously allow an additional 12-percent kVA output, at 65 deg C temperature rise, without decreasing rated transformer life.

D. Basic Impulse Level: 60kV.

E. Windings: Copper

F. Bus: Copper

G. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: 4 nominal 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated primary voltage; with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position indicator and padlock hasp.

H. Cooling System: Class OA/FA, liquid cooled, with forced air rating. Cooling systems shall include auxiliary cooling equipment, automatic controls, and status indicating lights.

I. Sound level may not exceed 58 dB, without fans.

J. Impedance: 5.75% percent.

K. Surge Arresters: Comply with IEEE C62.11, Distribution class; metal-oxide-varistor type, with ratings as indicated, connected in each phase of incoming circuit and ahead of any disconnecting device.

L. Accessories: Grounding pads, lifting lugs, and provisions for jacking under base. Transformers shall have a steel base and frame allowing use of pipe rollers in any direction, and an insulated, low-voltage, neutral bushing with removable ground strap. Include the following additional accessories:

1. Liquid-level gage. 2. Pressure-vacuum gage. 3. Liquid temperature indicator. 4. Drain and filter valves. 5. Pressure relief device. 6. Integral liquid spill containment.



2.5 SECONDARY DISTRIBUTION SECTION

A. Secondary Terminal Compartment: Bus bars mounted on standoff insulators.

B. Secondary Distribution: Low-voltage switchgear as specified in Section 262300 "Low-Voltage Switchgear."

2.6 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Compartment Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each compartment, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for components. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90. Conduct switchgear and switchboard tests according to ANSI C37.51.

B. Factory Tests: Perform the following factory-certified tests on each secondary unit substation:

1. Resistance measurements of all windings on the rated voltage connection and on tap extreme connections.

2. Ratios on the rated voltage connection and on tap extreme connections. 3. Polarity and phase relation on the rated voltage connection. 4. No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 5. Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection. 6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on the rated voltage connection and on tap

extreme connections. 7. Applied potential. 8. Induced potential. 9. Temperature Test: If a transformer is supplied with auxiliary cooling equipment to

provide more than one rating, test at lowest kilovolt-ampere Class OA or Class AA rating and highest kilovolt-ampere Class FA rating.

a. Temperature test is not required if a record of a temperature test on an essentially duplicate unit is available.

10. Owner will witness all required factory tests. Notify Architect at least 14 days before date of tests and indicate their approximate duration.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and space conditions for compliance with requirements for secondary unit substations and other conditions affecting performance of work.



B. Examine roughing-in of conduits and grounding systems to verify the following:

1. Wiring entries comply with layout requirements.

C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable conditions for secondary unit substation installation.

D. Verify that ground connections are in place and that requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at secondary unit substation location.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install secondary unit substations on concrete bases.

1. Anchor secondary unit substations to concrete bases according to manufacturer's written instructions and requirements in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems".

2. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 3 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit and 3 inches (100 mm) high.

3. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

4. Install dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full perimeter of base.

5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

6. Bolt transformers to channel-iron sills embedded in concrete bases. Install sills level and grout flush with floor or base.

B. Maintain minimum clearances and workspace at equipment according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 70.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for secondary unit substations, including key interlocking, control sequences, elementary single-line diagram, and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of secondary unit substation.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."



B. Connect transformer fans to circuit in panelboard RPB. Provide conduit, wire, and circuit breaker as required.

C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.5 CLEANING

A. After completing equipment installation and before energizing, inspect unit components. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Repair damaged finish to match original finish. Vacuum interiors of secondary unit substation section.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test according to NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. After installing secondary unit substation but before primary is energized, verify that grounding system at the substation tested at the specified value or less.

3. After installing secondary unit substation and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

4. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

a. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

4.2 FOLLOW-UP SERVICE

A. Voltage Monitoring and Adjusting: After Final Acceptance, perform the following voltage monitoring:

1. During a period of normal load cycles as evaluated by COTR, perform seven days of three-phase voltage recording at the outgoing section of the secondary unit substation. Use voltmeters with calibration traceable to the National Institute of Science and Technology standards. Voltage unbalance greater than 1 percent between phases, or



deviation of any phase voltage from the nominal value by more than plus or minus 5 percent during the test period, is unacceptable.

2. Corrective Action: If test results are unacceptable, perform the following corrective action, as appropriate:

a. Adjust transformer taps. b. Rebalance loads. c. Prepare written request for voltage adjustment by electric utility.

3. Retests: Repeat monitoring, after corrective action has been performed, until satisfactory results are obtained.

4. Report: Prepare a written report covering monitoring performed and corrective action taken.




SECTION 261300 - MEDIUM-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR – SOURCE TRANSFER SWITCH

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal-enclosed interrupter switchgear with the following optional components, features, and accessories:

1. Copper, tin-plated main bus 2. Surge arresters. 3. Automatic source transfer

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:

1. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for individual interrupter switches.

2. Time-current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices, including fusible devices.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment, include the following:

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Show method of field assembly and location and size of each field connection. Include the following:

a. Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings. b. Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,

and weights of each assembled section. c. Drawing of cable termination compartments showing preferred locations for

conduits and indicating space available for cable terminations. d. Floor plan drawing showing locations for anchor bolts and leveling channels. e. Current ratings of buses. f. Short-time and short-circuit ratings of switchgear assembly. g. Nameplate legends.

MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR – SOURCE TRANSFER SWITCH 261300 - 1


C. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

D. Source quality-control test reports.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and switchgear components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of switchgear and associated components through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. Comply with IEEE C2.


A. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere ratings for the following conditions:

1. Ambient temperature not exceeding 122° F (50° C).

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchgear, including clearances between switchgear and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. 2. Surge Arresters: One set of three of type and rating used. 3. Touchup Paint: Three containers of paint matching enclosure finish, each 0.5 pint.

B. Maintenance Tools: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for interrupter switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation. Include the following:

1. Fuse-handling tool.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, and complying with IEEE C37.74.

B. Ratings: Suitable for application in 3-phase, 60-Hz, solidly grounded-neutral system.

C. System Voltage: 13.2 kV nominal; 15 kV maximum

2.2 METAL-ENCLOSED INTERRUPTER SWITCHGEAR

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified

1. S&C Electric Company, Model PMH-6 (basis of design) 2. Federal Pacific, Type ATPS I/II 3. ABB Control, Inc., Type MES

B. Comply with IEEE C37.72.

C. Design Level of Available-Source Fault Current: Integrated short-circuit rating consistent with value of fault current indicated.



D. Ratings: Comply with standard ratings designated in IEEE C37.74 for maximum-rated voltage specified.

1. Main-Bus Rating: 600A, continuous.

E. Interrupter Switches: Stationary, gang operated and suitable for application at maximum short-circuit rating of integrated switchgear assembly.

1. Rating: 600A continuous duty and load break. 2. Duty-Cycle, Fault Closing: 22,000 asymmetrical A. 3. Switch Action: No external arc and no significant quantities of ionized gas released into

the enclosure. 4. Switch Construction: Supported entirely by interior framework of structure, with copper

switchblades and stored-energy operating mechanism. 5. Barriers: Full length of steel barriers to separate adjoining compartments. 6. Protective Shields: Cover live components and terminals. 7. Fuses: De-energized if switch is open.

F. Mechanical Interlock: Prevent opening switch compartment door unless switchblades are open, and prevent closing switch if door is open.

G. Source Transfer Control: Electronic microprocessor controls operations in accordance with programmed settings. Field programmable PLCs are not acceptable, product must be factory installed and tested as a complete unit. Provide remote terminal unit for future connection to SCADA system.

H. Automatic Transfer System: The system shall continuously monitor the voltage on each phase of the two incoming power circuits. Upon failure of any phase of the line serving the load, the system shall transfer the load to the other line, provided that the voltages on the other line are acceptable. The system shall have selector switch to allow selection of the following retransfer options: 1) manual or automatic retransfer 2) open transition or paralleled retransfer. System shall not allow parallel retransfer when voltages and phase of the two lines are not within acceptable limits

I. Voltage Sensors: Voltage sensors on each source provide three-phase sensing, control power and power for motor charging and tripping.

J. Power Fuses: Comply with the following and with applicable requirements in NEMA SG 2:

1. Indicator: Integral with each fuse to indicate when it has blown. 2. Mounting: Positively held in position with provision for easy removal and replacement

from front without special tools. 3. Current-Limiting Fuses: Full-range, fast-replaceable, current-limiting type that will

operate without explosive noise or expulsion of gas, vapor, or foreign matter from tube.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Outdoor Enclosure: Padmount type. Steel, weatherproof construction; free-standing and self-supporting. Enclosure shall meet the requirements of ANSI C57.12.28.



1. Each compartment shall have the following features:

a. Front barrier for each switch and fuse. b. Hinged front door with locking provisions.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish over rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.

C. Incoming-Line Units: Live front. Arranged to suit incoming lines.

D. Outgoing Feeder Unit: Live Front. Arranged to suit distribution feeder.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Main Bus: Copper, silver plated at connection points

B. Ground Bus: Copper, silver plated or copper, tin plated; minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches.

C. Bus Insulation: Covered with flame-retardant insulation.

D. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply with NEMA LA 1.

1. Install in cable termination compartment in each phase of circuit. 2. Size shall be 15kV MOV.

2.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials: Refer to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify units, devices, controls, and wiring.


A. Before shipment of equipment, perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Production tests on completed switchgear assembly according to IEEE C37.74.

B. Prepare equipment for shipment.

1. Provide suitable crating, blocking, and supports so equipment will withstand expected domestic shipping and handling shocks and vibration.

2. Weatherproof equipment for shipment. Close connection openings to prevent entrance of foreign material during shipment and storage.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard dark green finish applied to equipment before shipping.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchgear for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Anchor switchgear assembly to concrete base and attach by bolting. 1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no less

than 3 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. Construct concrete bases according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Diagram and Instructions:

1. Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Cable terminations at switchgear are specified in Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables."

B. Tighten bus joints, electrical connectors, and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.

C. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables" and Section 260513 "Medium-Voltage Cables."

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair damaged finishes.



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature and humidity within manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."



A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:

1. Inspect switchgear, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation 2. Assist in field testing of equipment 3. Report results in writing.

C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories:

a. Switch. b. Surge arresters.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.




SECTION 262300 - LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal-enclosed, low-voltage power circuit-breaker switchgear rated 1000 V and less for use in ac systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Service.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.


A. Product Data: For each type of switchgear, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of switchgear and related equipment.

1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment. Include the following:

a. Tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings. b. Enclosure types and details. c. Outline and general arrangement drawing showing dimensions, shipping sections,

and weights of each assembled section. d. Bus configuration with size and number of conductors in each bus run, including

phase, neutral, and ground conductors of main and branch buses. e. Current rating of buses. f. Short-time and short-circuit current rating of switchgear assembly. g. Nameplate legends. h. Mimic-bus diagram. i. Metering provisions with indication of approval by COTR. j. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR 262300 - 1


C. Samples: Representative portion of mimic bus with specified finish. Manufacturer's color charts showing colors available for mimic bus.


A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around switchgear where pipe and ducts are prohibited. Show switchgear layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Updated mimic-bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connections have been made, for record.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.



1. Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for potential transformer fuses, control power fuses, and fuses and fusible devices for fused circuit breakers.

2. Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed. 3. Touchup Paint: 3 containers of paint matching enclosure finish, each 0.5 pint (250 mL). 4. Overcurrent Trip Device: One of each type used. 5. Surge Arresters: One set of each typr and rating used.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.




B. Source Limitations: Obtain switchgear through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of switchgear and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 016000 "Product Requirements."

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Deliver switchgear in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Store switchgear indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

C. If stored in areas subjected to weather, cover switchgear to provide protection from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside switchgear; install electric heating (250 W per section) to prevent condensation.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace building components and structures to provide pathway for moving switchgear into place.

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify COTR no fewer than three weeks in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. See Section 011000 “Summary” for outage requirements.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without COTR’s written permission.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for switchgear, including clearances between switchgear, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. Also see space limitation information in section 261116 1.11A “Coordination”.

D. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:



1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 40 deg C. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 1000 feet (300 m).

1.11 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchgear and components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required clearances for workspace and equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. ABB Inc. 2. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.; Eaton Corporation. 3. General Electric Company. 4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 5. Square D; Schneider Electric.

2.2 RATINGS

A. Nominal System Voltage: 480/277 V, 4 wire, 60 Hz.

B. Main-Bus Continuous: 2500A.

C. Short-Time and Short-Circuit Current: Match rating of highest-rated circuit breaker in switchgear assembly.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Factory assembled and tested and complying with IEEE C37.20.1.

B. Indoor Enclosure Material: Steel.

C. Finish: IEEE C37.20.1, manufacturer's standard gray finish over a rust-inhibiting primer on phosphatizing-treated metal surfaces.

D. Section barriers between main and tie circuit-breaker compartments shall be extended to rear of section.








E. Full height metal barriers extending to the rear of the section, shall be provided between each vertical section of the switchgear.

F. Bus isolation barriers shall be arranged to isolate line bus from load bus at each circuit breaker. Bus isolation barriers shall also be provided at all control compartments and blank compartments, to isolate the main bus from the interior of the compartment.

G. Circuit-breaker compartments shall be equipped to house drawout-type circuit breakers and shall be fitted with hinged outer doors.

H. Fabricate enclosure with removable, hinged, rear cover panels to allow access to rear interior of switchgear.

I. Auxiliary Compartments: Match and align with basic switchgear assembly. Include the following:

1. Metering compartment that complies with Airport Authority requirements. 2. Bus transition sections. 3. Hinged front panels for access to metering, accessory, and blank compartments. 4. Pull box on top of switchgear for extra room for pulling cable, with removable top, front,

and side covers and ventilation provisions adequate to maintain air temperature in pull box within same limits as switchgear.

a. Set pull box back from front to clear circuit-breaker lifting mechanism. b. Bottom: Insulating, fire-resistant material with separate holes for cable drops into

switchgear. c. Cable Supports: Arranged to ease cabling and adequate to support cables

indicated, including those for future installation.

J. Bus bars connect between vertical sections and between compartments. Cable connections are not permitted.

1. Main Phase Bus: Uniform capacity the entire length of assembly. 2. Neutral Bus: 100 percent of phase-bus ampacity, except as indicated. Equip bus with

compression-connector terminations for outgoing circuit neutral conductors. 3. All bussing shall be copper. 4. Cable Connections for cables size #6 and larger: Compression type, copper. 5. Vertical Section Bus Size: Comply with IEEE C37.20.1, including allowance for spare

circuit breakers and spaces for future circuit breakers. 6. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Silver- or tin-plated, high-strength, electrical-grade

copper with copper circuit-breaker line connections. 7. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated. 8. Feeder Circuit-Breaker Load Terminals: Silver-plated copper bus extensions equipped

with compression connectors for outgoing circuit conductors. 9. Ground Bus: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent minimum conductivity, with compression

connector for feeder and branch-circuit ground conductors, minimum size 1/4 by 2 inches (6 by 50 mm).

10. Supports and Bracing for Buses: Adequate strength for indicated short-circuit currents. 11. Neutral bus equipped with compression-connector terminations for outgoing circuit

neutral conductors.



12. Neutral Disconnect Link: Bolted, uninsulated, 1/4-by-2-inch (6-by-50-mm) copper bus, arranged to connect neutral bus to ground bus.

13. Provide for future extensions from end of main phase, neutral, and ground bus by means of predrilled bolt-holes and connecting links.

14. Bus-Bar Insulation: Individual bus bars wrapped with factory-applied, flame-retardant tape or spray-applied, flame-retardant insulation.

a. Sprayed Insulation Thickness: 3 mils (0.08 mm), minimum. b. Bolted Bus Joints: Insulate with secure joint covers that can easily be removed and

reinstalled.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Instrument Transformers: Comply with IEEE C57.13.

1. Potential Transformers: Secondary-voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of 0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.

2. Current Transformers: Ratios as indicated; burden and accuracy class suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.

B. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Metering and SCADA interface shall be compatible with the Airport SCADA system and shall utilize a PowerLogic ION 7330 Digital, 3 phase power meter as manufactured by Square D. Meter shall measure voltage, current, power, power factor, frequency, kilowatt-hours and kilowatt demand as indicated below. Units shall have the following additional features: four optically isolated status inputs, two optically isolated RS485 communications ports, Modbus and DNP communications protocol. In addition, the meter shall have an Ethernet port. The meter shall include the following features:

1. Inputs from sensors or 5-A current-transformer secondaries, and potential terminals rated to 600 V.

2. Switch-selectable digital display of the following:

a. Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. b. Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. c. Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent. d. Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. e. Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent. f. Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent. g. Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent. h. Integrated Demand, with Demand Interval Selectable from 5 to 60 Minutes: Plus

or minus 2 percent. i. Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2 percent; stored

values unaffected by power outages for up to 72 hours.

3. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semiflush mounted in instrument compartment door.

C. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, metal-oxide-varistor type. Comply with IEEE C62.11 and NEMA LA 1.



1. Install on line side of main circuit breaker and connect in each phase of circuit. 2. Coordinate rating with circuit voltage.

D. Provision for Future Devices: Equip compartments with rails, mounting brackets, supports, necessary appurtenances, and bus connections.

E. Control Power Supply: Control power transformer supplying 120-V control circuits through secondary disconnect devices. Include the following features:

1. Dry-type transformers, in separate compartments for units larger than 3 kVA, including primary and secondary fuses.

2. Control Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses with current-limiting and overload protection.

3. Fuses are specified in Section 262813 "Fuses."

F. Control Wiring: Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection; and complying with the following:

1. Flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

2. Conductors sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.

2.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Description: Comply with IEEE C37.13.

B. Ratings: As indicated for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.

C. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating mechanism with the following features:

1. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator. 2. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment. 3. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Manually charged 4. Operation counter.

D. Trip Devices: Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current transformers or sensors per phase, a release mechanism, and the following features:

1. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions, independent of each other in both action and adjustment.

2. Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus 5 to plus 40 deg C.

3. Field-adjustable, time-current characteristics. 4. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on circuit

breakers, or a combination of these methods. 5. Three bands, minimum, for long-time- and short-time-delay functions; marked

"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum."



6. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip short-time-trip function for switchable I2t operation.

7. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions. 8. Ground-fault protection with at least three short-time-delay settings and three trip-time-

delay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide protection for the following: a. Four-wire circuit or system.

9. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip device to indicate type of fault.

E. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker operation, quantity as indicated. Each consists of two Type "a" and two Type "b" stages (contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary housing.

F. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and disconnected positions. Include the following features:

1. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position when it is closed, and prevent closure of circuit breaker unless it is in connected, test, or disconnected position.

2. Circuit-Breaker Positioning: An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected, test, and disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield. An open circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for removal from the structure with the door open. Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:

a. Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.

b. Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground contact disengaged.

G. Arc Chutes: Readily removable from associated circuit breaker when it is in disconnected position, and arranged to permit inspection of contacts without removing circuit breaker from switchgear.

H. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.

I. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Accessory Set: Furnish tools and miscellaneous items required for circuit-breaker and switchgear test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.

1. Racking handle to manually move circuit breaker between connected and disconnected positions.

2. Portable test set for testing all functions of circuit-breaker, solid-state trip devices without removal from switchgear.



3. Relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing switchgear meters and switchgear class relays.

B. Circuit-Breaker Removal Apparatus: Portable, floor-supported, roller-base, elevating carriage arranged for moving circuit breakers in and out of compartments.

C. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Identified and compartmented steel box or cabinet with lockable door.

D. Spare Parts: Provide two spare of the following: solid-state, overcurrent trip-devices.

E. Storage for Manual: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, arranged in single-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.

1. Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in switchgear sections to which applied, to produce a concise visual presentation of principal switchgear components and connections.

2. Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect. 3. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

B. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads. Include as-built data for low-voltage power switchgear and connections as follows:

1. Frame size of each circuit breaker. 2. Trip rating for each circuit breaker. 3. Conduit and wire size for each feeder.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces where switchgear will be installed for compliance with installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions of NECA 400.

B. Anchor switchgear assembly to 3-inch (100-mm), channel-iron floor sill embedded in concrete base and attach by bolting.



1. Sills: Select to suit switchgear; level and grout flush into concrete base. 2. Concrete Bases: 3 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend

base no more than 3 inches (75 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switchgear unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic anchor support. Construct concrete bases according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Diagram and Instructions:

1. Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on the front of switchgear.

a. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.

b. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution components, and major loads.

2. Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a copy of maintenance manual.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.5 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to switchgear, according to manufacturer's written instructions, throughout periods when switchgear environment is not controlled for temperature and humidity within manufacturer's stipulated service conditions.



3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."



A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each switchgear bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform the following:

1. Inspect switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections, and equipment.

2. Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal by means of point-to-point continuity testing. Verify that wiring installation complies with requirements in electrical Sections.

3. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Assist in field testing of equipment including pretesting and adjusting of equipment and

components. 5. Report results in writing.

C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS (note modification below). Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of the following NETA categories:

a. Switchgear. b. Circuit breakers. c. Instrument transformers. d. Metering and instrumentation. e. Ground-fault systems. f. Surge arresters.

2. Testing of Switchgear: The section in the INETA testing procedure relating to inspection of bolted connections, shall be replaced with the following: “Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance. Check tightness of all bolted electrical connections by use of a calibrated torque wrench. Each bolt shall be individually tested and individually



marked to indicate that it has been tested. Refer to manufacturer’s instructions or NETA ATS for proper torque levels.”

3. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Infrared Scanning: After Final Acceptance, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of switchgear. Remove front and rear panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of switchgear 11 months after date of Final Acceptance.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

4.2 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Section 260573.16 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."




SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards MDP-3 and MDP-4.


A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 6. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 7. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards.


A. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

B. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1.


A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows:

1. Ambient temperatures within limits specified.



2. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: See the “Utility Outages” heading in the “Summary” specification section.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

2. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

3. Identification: Laminated plastic nameplate for panelboard located at top of panelboard, plus nameplates for each circuit breaker located adjacent to the circuit breaker. See specification section “Electrical Identification” for additional requirements.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material for all buses: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.



3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.

E. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

F. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Mains: Main Lug Only

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Bolt-on circuit breakers.

2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 100 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.









3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

D. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

E. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

F. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing load balancing.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final designations. Obtain approval before creating nameplates.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard and each load circuit breaker with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.5 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions.



A. General: Comply with applicable standards of The InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA) including Standard ATS, "Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems."

B. Preparation: Perform the following preparations in advance of independent tests: 1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit. 2. Test continuity of each circuit. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 4. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Final Acceptance, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

C. Schedule tests and notify COTR at least one week in advance of schedule for test commencement.

D. Test procedure: 1. Independent Testing Organization: Arrange and pay for the services of an independent

electrical testing organization in accordance with the requirements of Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" to perform tests on panelboards. The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment, devices, installations, and systems. The testing firm shall have at least five years of experience in the testing of electrical equipment of the type, rating, and voltage used on this Project. The testing firm shall be a current full-member company of the International Electrical Testing Association (http://www.neta.org/). This independent testing firm shall perform duties as required under the terms of this Contract.

2. Test Objectives: To assure panelboard installation is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is installed in accordance with Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing.

3. Procedures: Comply with the INETA standard and IEEE 400. Upon satisfactory completion of tests, attach a label to tested components.




E. Reports: The testing organization shall maintain a written record of observations and tests, report defective materials and workmanship, and retest corrected defective items. Testing organization shall submit written reports to the COTR and Contractor.




SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency and standby power supply with the following features:

1. Natural gas engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Performance requirements for sensitive loads. 5. Outdoor enclosure.


1. Section 263600 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

B. NG: Natural Gas.


A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 1


1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and for designing vibration isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement

to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.



1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.




A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


D. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

F. Comply with ASME B15.1.


H. Comply with NFPA 70.

I. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.

J. Comply with UL 2200.

K. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

L. Noise Emission: Maximum of 70 dBA at 23 feet due to sound emitted by generator set including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation.


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:



1. Notify COTR no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without COTR’s written permission.

B. Environmental Conditions: Engine-generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:

1. Ambient Temperature: Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C. 2. Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet.

C. Unusual Service Conditions: Engine-generator equipment and installation are required to operate under the following conditions:

1. Generator installed on existing concrete foundation within existing screen wall.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of generator on existing concrete base for optimal performance and serviceability. Make connections to power feeders, auxiliary power circuits, communication wiring, control wiring and fuel supply from existing stub-ups in existing concrete pad. Adjust connections to accommodate generator set and enclosure.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Owner’s acceptance, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 2. Kohler Co.; Generator Division. 3. MTU

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.

1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and

address, and model and serial number of component.

D. Generator-Set Performance for Sensitive Loads:

1. Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance.

a. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed.

2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 0.5 second.

4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.





6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.

7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components.

9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load.

a. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.

10. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Natural gas.

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Engine Fuel System: 1. Natural Gas:

a. Carburetor. b. Secondary Gas Regulator. c. Fuel-Shutoff Solenoid Valve. d. Flexible Fuel Connector.

F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.



1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and noncollapsible under vacuum.

b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

I. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 23 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is

complete shall be 70 dBA or less.

J. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

K. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project

Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:



a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet within generator enclosure.

2.4 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

B. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.

C. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 1 system, and the following:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Generator overload.

D. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls:

1. AC voltmeter.



2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Start-stop switch. 11. Overspeed shutdown device. 12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. 13. Coolant low-level shutdown device. 14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device. 15. Generator overload.

E. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 systems.

1. Overcrank shutdown. 2. Coolant low-temperature alarm. 3. Control switch not in auto position. 4. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. 5. Battery low-voltage alarm.

2.5 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breakers: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. 2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

2.6 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.



E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Dripproof.

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.

J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.

2.7 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 100 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure. 1. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads. 2. Muffler Location: Within enclosure.

B. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions. 1. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed

to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.

2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Material: Standard neoprene. 2. Durometer Rating: 50. 3. Number of Layers: Two.



2.9 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.

1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by

Owner's representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.



C. Install packaged engine generator on existing concrete pad. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases.

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector. 1. Natural-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution are specified in

Section 231123 "Facility Natural-Gas Piping."

D. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."


B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

D. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.



E. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.

3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 7. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure

voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

8. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

9. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations 23 feet from the existing screen wall, and compare measured levels with required values.

F. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

G. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.

H. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

I. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

J. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

K. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.



L. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.

M. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

N. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.


3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.




SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and load.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.

TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 1



A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.


H. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:

1. Notify COTR no fewer than three days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without COTR’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Contactor Transfer Switches:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Caterpillar; Engine Div.




b. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. c. GE Zenith Controls. d. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division. e. Russelectric, Inc. f. MTU.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

G. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched simultaneously with phase poles.

H. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.








2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

I. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

D. Automatic Closed-Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions and characteristics:

1. Fully automatic make-before-break operation. 2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both power

sources not exceeding 100 ms. 3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and sensors

confirming both sources are present and acceptable.

a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator. b. Controls ensure that closed-transition load transfer closure occurs only when the 2

sources are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum, and plus or minus 5 percent maximum voltage difference.

4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break-before-make transfer.

E. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.

F. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.



3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings. c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not

available.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Identify components according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.


C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

E. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.



a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding

500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

f. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

F. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

G. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

H. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

J. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.


3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.




SECTION 310100 - EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and backfilling for underground ductbank and utility structures. 2. Base course for concrete and asphalt paving.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over utility in a trench, including haunches to support sides of utility.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Layer placed between the subgrade and asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before placing utility.

D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water and serve as under slab subdrainage.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.

1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet in width and pits more than 30 feet in either length or width.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Contracting Officer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Contracting Officer, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

EARTHWORK 310100 - 1


H. Natural soil or existing fill soil: all naturally occurring soils or fill soils occurring above rock, or weathered rock materials that do not meet the definition of “rock” below.

I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume confirmed visually by an independent geotechnical testing agency. Visual examination of rock requires removal of soil and weathered rock overburden.

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

L. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.4 LOCAL CODES AND STANDARDS

A. In addition to the requirements of this Section, work in the public right of way shall conform to the requirements of the VA Dept. of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highways and Structures (VDOT SSHS), latest Edition, except that Articles relating to Measurement and Payment do not apply.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Drainage fabric. 3. Separation fabric.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site or borrow soil

material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Field reports; in-place soil density tests. 3. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered. 4. Report of actual unconfined compressive strength and/or results of bearing tests of each

strata tested. 5. Test reports must be submitted daily to the Contracting Officer.


A. See Part 4 – TESTING below.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Site Information: Refer to Specification Section 011000 regarding verification of underground utilities.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Materials shall conform to the Virginia Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highways and Structures, latest Edition and Supplement and the Requirements of the Geotechnical Engineering report.

B. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

C. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter as approved by the approved testing agency.

D. Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.

E. Base Course: Conform to DPWSS, Section 804.04.

F. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Drainage Course Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

H. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 ½ inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

I. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a



protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Drainage Fabric: Nonwoven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:

1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50; ASTM D 4751.

C. Separation Fabric: Woven geotextile, specifically manufactured for use as a separation geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:

1. Grab Tensile Strength: 200 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 75 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 3. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 4 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30; ASTM D 4751.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.

C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. Requirements for dewatering should be coordinated with the qualified independent testing agency.



B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to

accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from

excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

3.3 BLASTING

A. Blasting shall not be performed.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials

and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavation for Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions

indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: As indicated.

C. Where indicated excavate trenches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course.

3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE

A. Notify COTR when excavations have reached required subgrade.



B. If approved testing agency (see Part 4 below) determines that unsatisfactory soil or rock material is present, continue excavation and replace with lean mixed concrete (2,000 psi at 28 days).

1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract

provisions for changes in the Work.

C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Testing Agency.

3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by placing lean mixed concrete (2,000 psi at 28 days) without altering bottom of foundation subgrade.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms where indicated. Shape backfill/bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.



B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.

C. Provide 4 inch- thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway base.

D. Place and compact initial structural backfill to a height of 12 inches over the utility pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both

sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.

E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed.

G. Place and compact final backfill to final subgrade.

H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.12 FILL

A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.

B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use structural backfill. 4. Under building slabs, use drainage fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use structural backfill.

3.13 MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost

or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified density.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.14 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12

inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each

layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and

compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 85 percent.

3.15 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.

3.16 BASE COURSES

A. Under pavements and walks, place base course on prepared subgrade and as follows:

1. Place base course material over subgrade. 2. Compact base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross

sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3. Shape base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single

layer.



5. When thickness of compacted base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.

3.17 DRAINAGE COURSE

A. Under slabs-on-grade, install drainage fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. Place drainage course on drainage fabric and as follows:

B. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows:

1. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer.

2. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.

3.18 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by the testing agency;

reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work,

and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.

3.19 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal – Soils: Do not haul any excess soil off Airport property. Load and transport all excess soil to a location on Airport property as designated by the COTR.

B. Disposal – Other Materials: Remove waste material, including asphalt, trash and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.




A. Codes and Standards: perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of the VDOT Standard Specifications for Highways and Structures, latest Edition and Supplements, and as directed by the independent testing agency.

B. Testing and Inspection Services: The contractor shall employ and pay for a qualified independent geotechnical testing laboratory to perform soil and rock testing and inspection service during earthwork operations.

C. Pre-excavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Independent testing agency geotechnical engineer or geotechnical engineer’s representative shall be present at the meeting.

4.2 TESTING

A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved.

D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least

one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.




SECTION 31 25 14 - STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract and Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, latest version of Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and other Division-01 Specifications apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preparation for and submitting for approval for a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SPPP).

1. Provisions for furnishing, installing and removal of silt fence, filter boxes, storm drain inlet protection, straw bale barriers, construction entrances, sediment traps, diversion berm, dust control and other erosion control measures during construction, and temporary and permanent soil stabilization measures, as noted in the approved SPPP. All measures and practices shall be in accordance with the latest version of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and for preventing contamination of storm water from construction activities in accordance with the Commonwealth Of Virginia Regulation 9VAC 25-180 (i.e., temporary fuel storage, fueling operations, equipment maintenance, hazardous material and waste handling, good housekeeping practices, etc.).

B. Related Sections

1. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for quality issues.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWA- Clean Water Act means the law passed by the Congress of the United States in 1972 controlling the Discharge of Pollutants into the Nation's waterways.

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 312514 - 1


B. BMP- Best Management Practices are defined as any one or group of management practices, activities, policies, equipment, and structures that will: prevent pollutants from entering the environment, minimize pollutants from entering the environment, and mitigate, reduce, and treat prior to the pollutant entering the environment.

C. NPDES- National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System is the national program for issuing, modifying, revoking, reissuing, terminating, monitoring and enforcing permits pursuant to sections 402, 318, and 405 of the CWA.

D. VDEQ- Virginia Department of Environmental Quality is the agency of the Commonwealth of Virginia that manages the Commonwealth of Virginia's environmental regulations.

E. VPDES- Virginia Pollutant Discharge Elimination System is the Commonwealth of Virginia program and regulations that describe the proper management of discharges of pollutants into the waters of the Commonwealth

F. DCR- The Commonwealth of Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation, Division of Soil and Water Conservation, regulates land disturbing activities and erosion and sedimentation compliance.

1.4 Submittals

A. Storm water Pollution Prevention Plan (SPPP) - Prepare and submit for written approval by the Authority in accordance with the information provided below. Do not initiate ground-disturbing activities until the Authority has approved the SPPP. In addition, the SPPP will serve as the Soil Erosion and Sediment Control Plan required as a condition of the Authority's issuance of a Construction Permit by the Authority's Building Codes Department. Issuance of this Construction Permit is required prior to initiation of any project construction.

B. The SPPP may utilize plans, details, notes and other information provided in the construction documents, however, such information shall not, in itself, be construed to meet the requirements of this Section. Provide additional details to ensure that the SPPP accurately reflects means and methods for construction.

C. Prepare the SPPP on regular 8 ½ X 11 inch paper. Include attachments of the plans showing locations of erosion and sediment control devices and BMPs. Submit four bound copies to the COTR for review and approval.



D. Plan Certification with Virginia Pollution Discharge Elimination System Regulation (9VAC 25-180) and DCR (4VAC50-30).

1. Submit with Plan Certification the following certification statement signed by an officer of the company of Contractor and signed by all its subcontractors:

"I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the General Permit for Discharges from Construction Activities that authorizes the storm water discharges from construction activities associated with the site identified by the permit."

2. The above certification shall be executed on the Contractor's letterhead. Include the name, title, address, and telephone number of contractor and all subcontractors, and the date the certification is made. The Certification shall be attached to the SPPP and submitted to the COTR.

E. Once the SPPP has been approved by the COTR, submit a Virginia Storm Water Management Program (VSMP) permit application to the Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation (DCR) to obtain the VSMP permit. Submit payment of $500 with the permit application. The Contractor shall include the cost of the VSMP in his proposal

F. Be responsible for submitting the Notice of Project Termination (NPT) shown in Appendix II for all construction activities within this particular construction project. Contractor shall notify the Authority and provide a copy to the COTR upon completion of this construction project.

G. Submit the name, and a copy of the certificate of competence issued by the Department of Conservation and Recreation for the person in charge of and responsible for carrying out the land-disturbing activity prior to conducting any land-disturbing activities.

H. Prepare the SPPP narrative and associated drawings in accordance with the following outline:

1. Site Description: A detailed description of the construction activities, physical features of the site, and other pertinent information shall be included in this Section.

a. A description of the nature of the construction activities;

b. A description of the intended sequence of major activities which disturb soils for major portions of the site (e.g. grubbing, excavation, grading);



c. Estimate of the total area of land disturbing activities. Land disturbing areas greater than 2,500 square feet require the implementation and enforcement of a SPPP.

d. Describe the quality of any discharge water from the site;

e. A description of the existing vegetative cover at the site, include an estimate of the total buffer area that is covered by the vegetation before construction activities commence.

f. The name of the receiving water(s), their tributaries, and the ultimate receiving water(s). A description of the aerial extent of wetlands present at the site and other sensitive habitats present on site describe measures that will be used to protect wetlands.

g. Include in the plan a schedule of the planned start and completion of construction activities, major grading activities, and other activities that may require stabilization measures to be initiated at the site.

2. Potential Pollution Sources:

a. Describe potential pollution sources. Description should include, but not be limited to, the following:

1) Vehicle Fueling: A description of the location and number of all above ground storage tanks (ASTs) and any storage containers that will be used for the purpose of fueling vehicles or storing any materials used during construction activities (indicate location on the site map).

2) Storage Tanks: ASTs storing regulated substances and greater than 660 gallons shall be registered with the Department of Environmental Quality. All ASTs shall be properly equipped and follow the AST requirements. For example, requirements include that ASTs be double walled or have 110% secondary containment devices that will not collect rainwater. Tanks shall have spill containment buckets and be properly labeled, etc. Earthen berms shall not be permitted.

3) Materials Storage: A description of the storage location and a minimum quantity of all hazardous and non-hazardous materials that might pollute storm water. Pollutants such as, but not limited to, paints, solvents, hydraulic fluids, engine oil, form oil, etc. that will be used during the course of construction activities. All containers of materials of any size that are used on site and their associated secondary containment shall be covered to prevent rainwater from coming in contact with the containers. Earthen



berms shall not be permitted. All drums and containers shall be removed from the site as they become empty.

4) Sanitary Waste Facility: A description of the location and the number of sanitary waste facilities (e.g. portable chemical toilets) and method of disposal for the subject waste during the course of construction activities on site.

5) Equipment Maintenance: A detailed description of how and where equipment will be maintained. This shall include fluid changes, servicing, breakdowns, etc. The plan shall provide a standard operating procedure that shall be used for the protection of the environment while maintaining the equipment.

6) Concrete Batch Plants: Provide a maintenance plan for the concrete washout area. The plan shall include inspection and pumping procedures, as well as water, solid disposal, and recycling procedures. All batch plants shall have a valid VDEQ air permit. Obtain a General Virginia Pollutant Discharge Elimination System Permit (GVPDES) in accordance with 9 VAC 25-193-10 for the batch plant. Submit both the GVPDES and the VDEQ air permits with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SPPP).

7) The SPPP shall include a drum and container management plan. The plan shall describe the methods and location for the containment, protection, and storage of all solvents, chemicals, petroleum products, and all toxic material as defined by the EPA brought on site. All drums and containers shall be stored within a secondary containment system and shall be covered to prevent rainwater from entering the secondary containment.

3. Best Management Practices (BMPs) And Control Measures. The purpose of this Section is to identify all appropriate BMPs and control measures that shall be implemented at the construction site. This Section of the plan shall clearly describe the construction activities in sequence and their associated BMPS, control measures, and Erosion and Sediment (E&S) controls that are applicable. This Section shall indicate the timing to achieve the above-referenced sequencing relative to the installation of BMPs, E&S, and the control measures.

a. The components of this Section of the plan shall, at a minimum, include but not be limited to the following:

1) Stabilization Practices: All stabilization practices, including interim and permanent stabilization measures as well as specific scheduling of the Implementation of the practices, shall be included in this Section. Where possible, this portion of the plan shall describe all existing vegetation that is



preserved for the purpose of site stabilization. Stabilization measures include, but are not limited to the following:

a) Vegetative buffer strips

b) Sod stabilization

c) Geotextile

d) Mulching

e) Temporary Seeding

f) Permanent Seeding

g) Protection of trees

h) Preservation of mature vegetation

i) Other measures/stabilization practices

2) Structural BMPS: This Section shall adequately describe the structural BMPs and practices that will divert and mitigate storm water runoff from soils, sediments, exposed materials, ASTs, and containers of hazardous/non-hazardous materials. Structural BMPs include, but are not limited to the following list:

a) Silt fences

b) Earth dikes

c) Drainage swales

d) Sediment traps

e) Subsurface drains

f) Secondary containment for ASTs and containers

g) Pipe slope drains

h) Coverage for ASTs and containers

i) Level spreaders

j) Storm drain inlet protection

k) Reinforced soil retaining systems



l) Rock outlet protection/wheel washers

m) Gabions

n) Construction rock entrance

o) Temporary or permanent sediment basins

p) Other BMPs and structural controls.

3) The installation of these structural BMPs may be subject to the CWA Section 404 "Permitting Requirements". Be responsible for determination whether the above-permitting requirements apply to any of the structural BMPs.

4) Provide wheel washers and construction rock entrances for all projects where constructions traffic enters or exits paved surfaces. Be responsible for ensuring that all wheel washers and construction rock entrances are designed and constructed to adequately meet the expected construction traffic demand.

5) Temporary or Permanent Sediment Basins

a) If the project site involves common drainage areas that serve 3 acres or more of disturbed area(s), a temporary or permanent sediment basin is required. Such a basin shall provide 134 cubic feet of storage per acre drained. Where 134 cubic feet of storage per acre drained or equivalent is not attainable due to site constraints, smaller sediment basins and sediment traps shall be used as approved by the COTR on a case-by-case basis.

b) To prevent the movement and erosion of soils, structural measures should be placed on all upland areas.

4. `Operational Practices (Good Housekeeping Practices). This Section shall include measures and BMPs including good housekeeping practices that address the following sources of pollution:

a. The plan shall contain measures that prevent trash, innocuous solid materials, building materials, garbage, and debris from entering the Authority's storm sewer system or directly into a stream or waterway.

b. Provide a daily program of vacuum or hand sweeping or other acceptable means of cleaning sediments that are tracked or transported onto the public roads from the



construction sites shall be implemented. The roads may be washed only after the sediments have been removed.

5. Inspection And Maintenance of BMPs

a. Provide a schedule of inspection of all structural BMPs, the necessary maintenance and corrective action to correct all discrepancies found on site. Designate qualified personnel that have adequate knowledge of E&S requirements and storm water management and pollution prevention requirements, to inspect all structural control measures and BMPs at "least every seven calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event that is .5 inches or greater."

b. At a minimum develop a checklist for these inspections that conforms to the inspection checklist of Appendix I. Areas where final stabilization has been established need only be inspected once every month. Provide the completed inspection checklist and a report summarizing the corrective actions taken by the contractor to the COTR according to the following schedule of frequencies:

c. Every seven calendar days: Under the normal circumstances.

d. Every 24 hours: After a rainfall of 0.5 inches or greater, of intensity.

e. Every 30 days: for the areas where final stabilization has been accomplished.

f. Correct any and all discrepancies immediately upon discovery. The SPPP shall be revised as necessary to reflect any modifications to strengthen the BMPs and other structural controls in order to address the discrepancies. The above inspections and findings shall be subject to Authority field verification. Be responsible for responding to all regulatory inquiries from the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality-Water Division (VDEQ-Water), Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation (DCR), and the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Region III. Be responsible for addressing the outcome of all compliance monitoring inspections conducted by the above regulatory agencies. Take all corrective actions as required by VDEQ-Water, DCR or EPA Region III.

6. Non-Storm water Discharge. This SPPP is for the sole purpose of preventing pollution associated with storm water runoff (Act of God: rain, snow, etc.). Plan shall identify all non-storm water components, process waste water discharges, and any other non-storm water influent that may exist in this particular construction site. Plan shall ensure that all of the above non-storm water discharges are appropriately eliminated, permitted or addressed through other acceptable regulatory permitting mechanisms.

7. Detailed Composite SPPP Map. Prepare the following:



a. Drainage pattern and approximate slopes anticipated after completing major grading activities on site

b. Soil disturbance areas

c. Location of all Best Management Practices (BMPs), structural controls, non-structural controls, good housekeeping practices (GHP) and other erosion and sediment (E&S) control measures to be used during the course of construction activities

d. Locations where stabilization is expected to be used, including the types of vegetative cover which will be employed on site

e. Location of all receiving waters, including their tributaries and the ultimate receiving waters (including wetlands/sensitive habitats)

f. Location of all points of discharge to existing storm sewers and outfalls

g. Existing and planned paved areas, impervious surfaces, and buildings

h. Location of all post-construction BMPs and Storm water management practices that will address the long-term water quality improvement needs for the site, if applicable.

i. Location of any fuel storage, materials storage and sanitary waste and other potential pollution sources and their associated BMPs. shall be reflected on the site map.

j. Two site maps shall be developed, one indicating pre-construction and during construction site conditions and the second indicating final site conditions. Maps shall be to the same scale.

1.5 Quality Assurance

A. Prepare and submit the SPPP with input from each subcontractor.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

A. Provide erosion and sediment control devices and products as indicated, in accordance with the SPPP and in accordance with the latest updated version of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Implementation

A. Implement and maintain the approved SPPP throughout the life of the contract in accordance with provisions of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and applicable contract documents.

B. Exercise every reasonable precaution, including temporary and permanent measures, throughout the duration of the project to control erosion and prevent or minimize pollution of rivers, streams, lakes and other receiving waters. Apply siltation and stabilization control measures to material, subject to erosion, exposed by any activity associated with construction including but not limited to local material sources, stockpiles, disposal areas, and haul roads.

C. Initiate stabilization measures as soon as practicable in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased but no later than 14 days after the construction activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Except as provided in the following paragraphs:

1. If snow cover and or severe weather conditions preclude initiation of the stabilization measures by the 14th day after construction activities have ceased, either temporarily or permanently, the stabilization practices shall be initiated as soon as practicable.

2. If construction activities resume on a portion of the site within 21 days from the date that construction activities have temporarily ceased, then stabilization practices need not be initiated on that particular portion of the site by the 14th day after construction activities have temporarily ceased.



D. Be solely responsible for complying with the soil erosion, sedimentation control and good housekeeping requirements of this Contract, and for otherwise preventing contamination of storm water from construction activities. Be solely responsible for any and all fines, penalties or damage that result from the Contractor’s failure to comply.

3.2 Erosion and Siltation Control:

A. Control erosion and siltation through the use of the devices and measures specified herein, in the approved SPPP or as is otherwise necessary. The Authority reserves the right to require other temporary measures not specifically described herein to correct an erosion or siltation condition.

B. Maintenance: Maintain erosion and siltation control devices and measures in a functional condition at all times. Inspect temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures after each rainfall and at least daily during periods of prolonged rainfall. Correct deficiencies immediately. Make a daily review of the location of erosion and sediment control devices to ensure that they are properly located for effectiveness. Where deficiencies exist, make corrections immediately as approved or directed by the COTR.

PART 4 - CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL

4.1 Field Quality Control

A. Conform to all applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements". Be responsible for periodic inspections for conformance with the approved SPPP. The results of the periodic inspections shall be submitted to the COTR upon completion.



APPENDIX I



SPPP INSPECTION CHECKLIST

BMP

Proper

Installation

Yes, No. or NA

Proper

Operation

Yes or No

Housekeeping

Practices

Good-Poor

Potential

Hazard

Yes or No

Discharge:

Storm water

Non-storm water

Effectiveness

of BMP

Observations

Comments

1. Drainage Swale

2. Gabion

3. Silt Fence

4. Dry Pond

5. Cattle Grate

6. Earth Dike

7. Sediment Trap

8. Hay Bale

9. Subsurface Drains

10. Pipe Slope Drains

11. Level Spreaders

12. Storm Drain Inlet Protection



BMP

Proper

Installation

Yes, No. or NA

Proper

Operation

Yes or No

Housekeeping

Practices

Good-Poor

Potential

Hazard

Yes or No

Discharge:

Storm water

Non-storm water

Effectiveness

of BMP

Observations

Comments

13. Reinforced Soil Retaining Basins

14. Temporary or Permanent Sediment Basins

15. Construction Rock Entrance

16. Rock Outlet Protection

17. Secondary Containment for all ASTs

18. Evidence of oil, fuel or other material spills or releases on site

19. Other BMPs

20. Other BMPs



Please list any discrepancies or items that are not in compliance in the space provided below.

Please list the corrective actions necessary to abate the above-listed discrepancies.

Note: All corrective actions must take place within 7 days of the discovery of the above discrepancies and non-compliance item(s).

Inspector:

Signature: Date: ________________



APPENDIX II



Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

Notice of Project Termination

For

Storm water Discharges from Construction Activities

Note: This form shall be completed by the construction contractors upon final stabilization of the site, upon elimination of all storm water, or when the construction contractor has changed within the same construction project. The contractor shall submit a completed copy of this form to the Authority, at the address provided below and a copy to PMC's Resident Engineer within 30 days after final stabilization has been achieved or when it is no longer the construction contractor for this project. (An officer of the company shall sign this certification)

Completed form shall be submitted to:

Manager, Building Codes/Environmental Branch

Engineering Division

Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport

Washington, D.C. 20001

Copy to: Parsons Management Consultants

For IAD Projects

Parsons Management Consultants

23835 Wind Sock Drive

Chantilly, VA 20166

Attn: Project’s Resident Engineer



Contract Number:

Contractor Information:

Contractor's name and mailing address:

Subcontractor(s) name and mailing address:

Location of Construction Site:

Project Name

Address

City State Zip Code ____________

Latitude Longitude ______________________

If there is a change in the contractor(s) please provide the new contractor's information here:

Certification:

"I certify under penalty of law that disturbed soils at the identified project have been finally stabilized and temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed or will be removed at an appropriate time and that all storm water discharges associated with construction activities in this project have been eliminated, or that I am no longer the contractor for this construction site."

Print name:

Title:

Signature:

Date:

(This certification shall be signed by an officer of the company)

STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 312514 - 18


APPENDIX III



METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY

WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS SPILL NOTIFICATION CHECKLIST

Note: This checklist shall be completed by all tenants of Washington Dulles International Airport (IAD) in the event of a hazardous material spill (under CERCLA, CWA, CAA, TSCA and/or a release of hazardous waste under RCRA). It is the responsibility of the tenants to notify all pertinent regulatory agencies within the time frame prescribed under the respective statutes and regulations.

1. Tenant Name:

2. Facility location within IAD where spill occurred:

3. Facility Environmental Manager, Foreman, or person in charge:

4. Time and date of release:

5. Amount of release material:

6. Description of how the release occurred and whether material reached a floor drain (if this situation occurred, describe amount of material that entered drain):

7. Type of material released (include common and chemical name; attach MSDS and/or Waste Manifest):

8. In the event of a release, verbal notification to IAD Fire Department and IAD Environmental Coordinator must be made immediately as follows:

Fire Department:

(703) 572-2970

IAD Government

Programs Engineer

(703) 572-0210




SECTION 32 1216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt paving overlay.


1. Section "Earthwork" for aggregate subbase and base courses.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of the Virginia Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highways and Structures latest edition hereinafter referred to as the “Standard Specifications.” 1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in

“Standard Specifications” do not apply to this Section. 2. Should the “Standard Specifications” conflict with this Section the more stringent of the

two shall apply.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work.

C. Samples: For each paving fabric, 12 by 12 inches minimum.

D. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by manufacturers.


ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by the

Virginia Department of Transportation.

B. Requirements: Comply with “VA DOT Standard Specifications for Highways and Structures” for asphalt paving work.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met: 1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of

placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of

placement.

B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials, 50 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that conform to Division 400 of the “VA DOT Standard Specifications for Highways and Structures.”

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. General: Asphalt materials shall conform to Division 400 of the “Standard Specifications.”



2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type N.

1. Color: White.

B. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes as indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll subbase using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 COLD MILLING

A. Clean existing pavement surface of loose and deleterious material immediately before cold milling. Remove existing asphalt pavement by cold milling to grades and cross sections indicated. 1. Mill to a depth of 1-1/2 inches. 2. Mill to a uniform finished surface free of gouges, grooves, and ridges. 3. Control rate of milling to prevent tearing of existing asphalt course. 4. Repair or replace curbs, manholes, and other construction damaged during cold milling. 5. Excavate and trim unbound-aggregate base course, if encountered, and keep material

separate from milled hot-mix asphalt.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving. 1. Sweep loose granular particles from surface of unbound-aggregate base course. Do not

dislodge or disturb aggregate embedded in compacted surface of base course.



B. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd.. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum. 1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over

surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.. 1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted. 1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side

++of one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required. 1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to

overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. 1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches.



4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, "Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt Pavements."

5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement.

6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.6 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. 1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the density stated in the “Standard Specifications.”

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.



B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas: 1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.

3.8 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.

E. Broadcast glass spheres uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal.

3.9 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow excavated materials to accumulate on-site.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether Tested

Work complies with or deviates from specified requirements.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.



E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to the requirements of Division 400 of the “Standard Specifications.”

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.




SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Driveways and roadways. 2. Curbs and gutters. 3. Walkways. 4. Base concrete paving for asphalt


1. Division 31 Section "Earthwork" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course.

2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants within concrete pavement and at isolation joints of concrete pavement with adjacent construction.

1.3 LOCAL CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Provide cement concrete paving according to materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of VA Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highways and Structures latest edition hereinafter referred to as the “Standard Specifications.”

B. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in “Standard Specifications” do not apply to the Section.

C. Should the “Standard Specifications” conflict with this Section, the more stringent of the two shall apply.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.

B. Design Mixes: For each concrete pavement mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Material Certificates: Signed by material producer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements..

D. Quality control testing reports.

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed pavement work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer must be acceptable to the Virginia Department of Transportation.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant and each aggregate from one source.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by the requirements of the Contract Documents.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Concrete Pavement: The following materials shall conform to the requirements of the “Standard Specifications,” Division 500.

1. Cementitious materials and aggregates. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

B. Concrete Sidewalk: Comply with the requirements of the “Standard Specifications,” Division 600.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a radius 100 feet or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.3 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes in accordance with the “Standard Specifications,” Division 500 for pavements and Division 600 for sidewalks.

B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the trial batch method. See PART 4 – TESTING below.

C. Proportion mixes to provide concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 2 1/2-31/2 inches.

2.4 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction.

Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph. 2. Subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch

require correction according to requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork."

C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.




A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating reinforcement and with recommendations in CRSI's "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed

joints, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcement steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.

C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with requirements of the “Standard Specifications,” Divisions 500 and 600

3.7 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. General: Finish in accordance with the requirements of the “Standard Specifications,” Divisions 500 and 600.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and follow recommendations in ACI 305R for hot-weather protection during curing.


A. Testing Agency: Provide an independent testing agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.

C. Submit quality control testing reports. END OF SECTION 321313



SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Expansion and contraction joints within cement concrete pavement. 2. Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint-sealant samples in 13-mm wide joints formed between two 150-mm long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For Testing Agency

E. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for sealants.


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 - 1


B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use manufacturer’s standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data

that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

D. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing of current sealant products within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed with the Work.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 4.4 deg C.

3. When joint substrates are wet or covered with frost. 4. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 5. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.



2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations

2.3 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Multicomponent Jet-Fuel-Resistant Sealant for Concrete: Pourable, chemically curing elastomeric formulation complying with the following requirements for formulation and with ASTM C 920 for type, grade, class, and uses indicated:

1. Urethane Formulation: Type M; Grade P; Class 12-1/2; Uses T, M, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

2.4 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Jet-Fuel-Resistant Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3569.

B. Jet-Fuel-Resistant Sealant for Concrete and Tar Concrete: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3581.

C. Elastomeric Sealant for Concrete: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3406.

D. Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single-component formulation complying with ASTM D 3405.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness and width required to control sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant, and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

D. Round Backer Rods for Cold-Applied Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

2.6 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install backer materials of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of backer materials. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear backer materials. 3. Remove absorbent backer materials that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Provide recessed joint configuration for silicone sealants of recess depth and at locations indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.


WASHINGTON DULLES INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT IF1302 DULLES EAST BUILDING ELECTRICAL SUBSTATION REPLACEMENT NOVEMBER 6, 2013 3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.




SECTION 321723 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes painted markings applied to asphalt and concrete pavement.


1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to marking pavement including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Pavement aging period before application of pavement markings. b. Review requirements for protecting pavement markings, including restriction of

traffic during installation period.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Shop Drawings: For pavement markings.

1. Indicate pavement markings, colors, lane separations, defined parking spaces, and dimensions to adjacent work.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and not exceeding 95 deg F (35 deg C).

PAVEMENT MARKINGS 321723 - 1


2.1 PAVEMENT-MARKING PAINT

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: Alkyd-resin type, lead and chromate free, ready mixed, complying with AASHTO M 248, Type S; colors complying with FS TT-P-1952.

1. Color: White and Yellow.

B. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1 made of 100 percent recycled glass.

1. Roundness: Minimum 80 percent true spheres by weight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that pavement is dry and in suitable condition to begin pavement marking according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Proceed with pavement marking only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with COTR.

B. Allow paving to age for a minimum of 30 days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.

D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils (0.4 mm). 1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal. (0.72 kg/L).

E. Re-marking of parking spaces and pedestrian walkway after completion of electrical equipment installation and pavement restoration shall match existing markings in location and dimension.

F. Refer to standard details at the end of this section for pavement markings.

3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect pavement markings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.



B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
